WO2004009533A1 - Acetylamino benzoic acid compounds and their use for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease - Google Patents

Acetylamino benzoic acid compounds and their use for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2004009533A1
WO2004009533A1 PCT/US2003/023183 US0323183W WO2004009533A1 WO 2004009533 A1 WO2004009533 A1 WO 2004009533A1 US 0323183 W US0323183 W US 0323183W WO 2004009533 A1 WO2004009533 A1 WO 2004009533A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
substituted
unsubstituted
benzoic acid
phenoxy
heteroaryl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2003/023183
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Richard G. Wilde
M. Welch. Ellen
James Jan Takasugi
Neil G. Almstead
Steven Marc Rubenstein
Holger Beckmann
Original Assignee
Ptc Therapeutics, Inc.
Tularik Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Ptc Therapeutics, Inc., Tularik Inc. filed Critical Ptc Therapeutics, Inc.
Priority to AU2003254157A priority Critical patent/AU2003254157A1/en
Priority to EP03766013A priority patent/EP1525185A1/en
Priority to CA002493457A priority patent/CA2493457A1/en
Publication of WO2004009533A1 publication Critical patent/WO2004009533A1/en
Priority to US11/789,625 priority patent/US7763656B2/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D207/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D207/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D207/18—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member
    • C07D207/22—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom with only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom having one double bond between ring members or between a ring member and a non-ring member with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D207/24—Oxygen or sulfur atoms
    • C07D207/26—2-Pyrrolidones
    • C07D207/273—2-Pyrrolidones with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to other ring carbon atoms
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/16—Amides, e.g. hydroxamic acids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C235/00—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms
    • C07C235/02—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and singly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C235/04—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and singly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated
    • C07C235/18—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and singly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated having at least one of the singly-bound oxygen atoms further bound to a carbon atom of a six-membered aromatic ring, e.g. phenoxyacetamides
    • C07C235/24—Carboxylic acid amides, the carbon skeleton of the acid part being further substituted by oxygen atoms having carbon atoms of carboxamide groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms and singly-bound oxygen atoms bound to the same carbon skeleton the carbon skeleton being acyclic and saturated having at least one of the singly-bound oxygen atoms further bound to a carbon atom of a six-membered aromatic ring, e.g. phenoxyacetamides having the nitrogen atom of at least one of the carboxamide groups bound to a carbon atom of a six-membered aromatic ring
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C323/00—Thiols, sulfides, hydropolysulfides or polysulfides substituted by halogen, oxygen or nitrogen atoms, or by sulfur atoms not being part of thio groups
    • C07C323/50—Thiols, sulfides, hydropolysulfides or polysulfides substituted by halogen, oxygen or nitrogen atoms, or by sulfur atoms not being part of thio groups containing thio groups and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C323/62—Thiols, sulfides, hydropolysulfides or polysulfides substituted by halogen, oxygen or nitrogen atoms, or by sulfur atoms not being part of thio groups containing thio groups and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having the sulfur atom of at least one of the thio groups bound to a carbon atom of a six-membered aromatic ring of the carbon skeleton
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C327/00—Thiocarboxylic acids
    • C07C327/38—Amides of thiocarboxylic acids
    • C07C327/40—Amides of thiocarboxylic acids having carbon atoms of thiocarboxamide groups bound to hydrogen atoms or to acyclic carbon atoms
    • C07C327/42—Amides of thiocarboxylic acids having carbon atoms of thiocarboxamide groups bound to hydrogen atoms or to acyclic carbon atoms to hydrogen atoms or to carbon atoms of a saturated carbon skeleton
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D209/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D209/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring
    • C07D209/44—Iso-indoles; Hydrogenated iso-indoles
    • C07D209/48—Iso-indoles; Hydrogenated iso-indoles with oxygen atoms in positions 1 and 3, e.g. phthalimide
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/62—Oxygen or sulfur atoms
    • C07D213/63—One oxygen atom
    • C07D213/64—One oxygen atom attached in position 2 or 6
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D239/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings
    • C07D239/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D239/24—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D239/28—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazine or hydrogenated 1,3-diazine rings not condensed with other rings having three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D239/32—One oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen atom
    • C07D239/38—One sulfur atom
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D257/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having four nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D257/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having four nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms not condensed with other rings
    • C07D257/04—Five-membered rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D271/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms and one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D271/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having two nitrogen atoms and one oxygen atom as the only ring hetero atoms not condensed with other rings
    • C07D271/06—1,2,4-Oxadiazoles; Hydrogenated 1,2,4-oxadiazoles
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D317/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having two oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D317/08—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having two oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the hetero atoms in positions 1 and 3
    • C07D317/44—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having two oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the hetero atoms in positions 1 and 3 ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D317/46—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings having two oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms having the hetero atoms in positions 1 and 3 ortho- or peri-condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems condensed with one six-membered ring
    • C07D317/48—Methylenedioxybenzenes or hydrogenated methylenedioxybenzenes, unsubstituted on the hetero ring
    • C07D317/62—Methylenedioxybenzenes or hydrogenated methylenedioxybenzenes, unsubstituted on the hetero ring with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to atoms of the carbocyclic ring
    • C07D317/64—Oxygen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C2601/00—Systems containing only non-condensed rings
    • C07C2601/06—Systems containing only non-condensed rings with a five-membered ring
    • C07C2601/08—Systems containing only non-condensed rings with a five-membered ring the ring being saturated
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C2602/00—Systems containing two condensed rings
    • C07C2602/02—Systems containing two condensed rings the rings having only two atoms in common
    • C07C2602/04—One of the condensed rings being a six-membered aromatic ring
    • C07C2602/08—One of the condensed rings being a six-membered aromatic ring the other ring being five-membered, e.g. indane
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C2602/00—Systems containing two condensed rings
    • C07C2602/02—Systems containing two condensed rings the rings having only two atoms in common
    • C07C2602/04—One of the condensed rings being a six-membered aromatic ring
    • C07C2602/10—One of the condensed rings being a six-membered aromatic ring the other ring being six-membered, e.g. tetraline

Definitions

  • the invention relates to acetylamino benzoic acid compounds, compositions comprising the compounds and methods for treating or preventing diseases associated with nonsense mutations of mRNA by administering these compounds or compositions.
  • Gene expression in cells depends upon the sequential processes of transcription and translation. Together, these processes produce a protein from the nucleotide sequence of its corresponding gene.
  • Transcription involves the synthesis of mRNA from DNA by RNA polymerase. Transcription begins at a promoter region of the gene and continues until termination is induced, such as by the formation of a stem-loop structure in the nascent RNA or the binding of the rho gene product.
  • Protein is then produced from mRNA by the process of translation, occurring on the ribosome with the aid of tRNA, tRNA synthetases and various other protein and RNA species.
  • Translation comprises the three phases of initiation, elongation and termination. Translation is initiated by the formation of an initiation complex consisting of protein factors, mRNA, tRNA, cofactors and the ribosomal subunits that recognize signals on the mRNA that direct the translation machinery to begin translation on the mRNA. Once the initiation complex is formed, growth of the polypeptide chain occurs by the repetitive addition of amino acids by the peptidyl transferase activity of the ribosome as well as tRNA and tRNA synthetases.
  • the presence of one of the three termination codons (UAA, UAG, UGA) in the A site of the ribosome signals the polypeptide chain release factors (RFs) to bind and recognize the termination signal. Subsequently, the ester bond between the 3' nucleotide of the tRNA located in the ribosome' s P site and the nascent polypeptide chain is hydrolyzed, the completed polypeptide chain is released, and the ribosome subunits are recycled for another round of translation.
  • RFs polypeptide chain release factors
  • Mutations of the DNA sequence in which the number of bases is altered are categorized as insertion or deletion mutations (frameshift mutations) and can result in major disruptions of the genome. Mutations of the DNA that change one base into another are labeled missense mutations and are subdivided into the classes of transitions (one purine to another purine, or one pyrimidine to another pyrimidine) and transversions (a purine to a pyrimidine, or a pyrimidine to a purine).
  • Insertions, deletions, transition and transversion mutations can all result in a nonsense mutation, or chain termination mutation, in which the base mutation or frameshift mutation changes an amino acid codon into one of the three stop codons. These premature stop codons can produce aberrant proteins in cells as a result of premature translation termination.
  • a nonsense mutation in an essential gene can be lethal and can also result in a number of diseases, such as, cancers, lysosomal storage disorders, the muscular dystrophies, cystic fibrosis and hemophilia, to name a few.
  • suppression of the nonsense mutation can arise as a result of a mutation in one of the tRNA molecules so that the mutant tRNA can recognize the nonsense codon, as a result of mutations in proteins that are involved in the translation process, as a result of mutations in the ribosome (either the ribosomal RNA or ribosomal proteins), or by the addition of compounds known to alter the translation process (for example, cycloheximide or the aminoglycoside antibiotics) .
  • LINCL classical late infantile neuronal ceroid lipofuscinosis
  • LINCL a fatal childhood neurodegenerative disease with currently no effective treatment.
  • Premature stop codon mutations in the gene CLN2, encoding the lysosomal tripeptidyl-peptidase 1 (TPP-I) are associated with disease in approximately half of children diagnosed with LLNCL.
  • the ability of the aminoglycoside gentamicin to restore TPP-I activity in LINCL cell lines has been examined.
  • CFTR Transmembrane Conductance Regulator
  • Small molecule therapeutics or prophylactics that suppress premature translation termination by mediating the misreading of the nonsense codon would be useful for the treatment of a number of diseases.
  • the discovery of small molecule drugs, particularly orally bioavailable drugs, may lead to the introduction of a broad spectrum of selective therapeutics which can be used against disease caused by nonsense mutations
  • the invention encompasses novel compounds, novel pharmaceutical compositions and novel methods of treatment.
  • the compounds, compositions, and methods are, in part, based upon the modulation of premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay which play a role in a variety of diseases. Such diseases can occur due to the decreased amount of active protein produced as a result of premature termination of translation.
  • the compounds of the invention allow the translation of mRNA to continue past the nonsense mutation resulting in the production of full length protein.
  • the invention encompasses compounds, compositions, and methods for treating and preventing a variety of diseases, in particular genetic diseases.
  • This invention encompasses acetylamino benzoic acid compounds of formula I:
  • X is oxygen, sulfur, CO, SO or S(O) 2 ;
  • Y is oxygen or sulfur
  • Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl; n is an integer from 0 to 4; R 1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO 2 R 7 , CF 3 , CN, COOH, COR 7 , or COOR 7 ;
  • R is hydrogen, or taken together with R and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring;
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF 3 , OCF 3 , OCHF 2 , CN, COOH, COOR 7 , SO 2 R 7 , NO 2 , NH 2 , or N(R 7 ) 2 ;
  • R 6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF 3 ; with the proviso that when X is O, Y is O, n is 0 and R 1 is hydrogen, then Z is not 4- chloroph
  • the invention encompasses acetylamino benzoic acid compounds of the formula IV:
  • the invention further encompasses a method for modulation of premature translation termination or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay in a cell comprising contacting __ _ _ a cell exhibiting premature translation termination or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay with an effective amount of a compound of the formula V:
  • V or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymorphs, stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers thereof wherein:
  • X is oxygen, sulfur, CO, SO or S(O) 2 ;
  • Y is oxygen or sulfur;
  • Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
  • n is an integer from 0 to 4;
  • R 1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO 2 R 7 , CF 3 , CN, COOH, COR 7 , or COOR 7 ;
  • R° is hydrogen, or taken together with R 1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring;
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF 3 , OCF 3 , OCHF 2 , CN, COOH, COOR 7 , SO 2 R 7 , NO 2 , NH 2 , orN(R 7 ) 2 ;
  • R 6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R 7 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF 3 .
  • the compounds of formulas I, II, III, IV and V are pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymorphs, bio-hydrolyzable esters, racemates, or purified stereoisomers including, but not limited to, optically pure enantiomers and diastereomers.
  • the invention further encompasses methods of treating or preventing a disease ameliorated by modulation of premature translation termination or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay, or ameliorating one or more symptoms associated therewith comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the formula V and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, solvates, clathrates, prodrugs or polymorphs thereof.
  • the disease is a genetic disease; a CNS disease; an inflammatory disease; a neurodegenerative disease; an autoimmune disease; a proliferative disease, in particular cancer; a cardiovascular disease; or a pulmonary disease; more preferably the disease includes, but is not limited to, amyloidosis, LINCL, hemophilia, Alzheimer's disease, atherosclerosis, giantism, dwarfism, hypothyroidism, hyperthyroidism, cystic fibrosis, aging, obesity, Parkinson's disease, Niemann Pick's disease, cystic fibrosis, familial hypercholesterolemia, retinitis pigmentosa, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, or Marfan syndrome.
  • the invention further encompasses methods of treating or preventing, or ameliorating a genetic disease one or more symptoms associated with or manifestations of a genetic disease comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the formula V and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, solvates, clathrates, prodrugs or polymorphs thereof, hi a preferred embodiment, the disease is a CNS disease; an inflammatory disease; a neurodegenerative disease; a cardiovascular disease; an autoimmune disease; cancer; more preferably, the genetic disease includes, but is not limited to, amyloidosis, LINCL, hemophilia, Alzheimer's disease, atherosclerosis, giantism, dwarfism, hypothyroidism, hyperthyroidism, cystic fibrosis, aging, obesity, Parkinson's disease, Niemann Pick's disease, cystic fibrosis, familial hypercholesterolemia, retinitis pigmentosa, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, or Marfan
  • the invention further relates to methods of treating, preventing, or ameliorating cancer or one or more symptoms associated with or manifestations of cancer comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the formula V and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, solvates, clathrates, prodrugs or polymo ⁇ hs thereof.
  • the patient is a mammal, more preferably a human susceptible to or at risk of acquiring a genetic disease
  • the patient has undergone a screening process to determine the presence of a nonsense mutation comprising the steps of screening a subject or cells extracted therefrom by an acceptable nonsense mutation screening assay
  • the therapy is personalized in that the patient is screened for a nonsense mutation screening assay and treated by the administration of one or more compounds of the invention; particularly, the patient may be treated with a compound particularly suited for the mutations in question; e.g., depending upon the disease type, cell type, and the gene in question.
  • the patient is an infant or child.
  • the invention encompassing the treatment of pregnant woman or the fetus directly.
  • the compound is administered parenterally, transdermally, mucosally, nasally, buccally, sublingually, or orally; more preferably the compound is administered orally, most preferably the compound is administered orally in the form of a tablet or capsule.
  • the invention encompasses methods for modulating premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay.
  • the invention further encompasses a method for suppressing premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay in a cell comprising contacting a cell exhibiting premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay with an effective amount of a compound of formula I, II, III, IV or V.
  • the invention further encompasses a method for inducing nonsense suppression in a cell comprising contacting a cell exhibiting a nonsense mutation with an effective amount of a compound of formula I, II, III, IV or V.
  • a nonsense codon can be present in the DNA or RNA of any type of cell and can arise naturally or result from mutagenesis.
  • cells encompassed by the present methods include animal cells, mammalian cells, bacterial cells, plant cells and virally infected cells.
  • the nonsense codon was present in the progenitor DNA.
  • the nonsense codon resulted from mutagenesis.
  • the ability of the compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V to promote readthrough of stop codons makes them useful in the treatment or prevention of any disease which is caused in whole or in part by a nonsense mutation. Such diseases can occur due to the decreased amount of active protein produced as a result of premature termination of translation.
  • the compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V allow the translation of mRNA to continue past the nonsense mutation resulting in the production of full length protein.
  • a powerful aspect of the invention is that the therapeutic activity of compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V are not necessarily disease specific, instead are effective at treating of preventing any disease associated with a nonsense mutation. Further, the methods of the invention may be patient specific.
  • a patient may be screened to determine if this disease is associated with a nonsense mutation. If so, they can be treated with a compound of the invention.
  • the compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V are useful for treating or preventing genetic diseases. Genetic diseases that can be treated or prevented by compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V include cancer, autoimmune disease, blood disease, collagen disease, diabetes, inflammatory diseases or a central nervous system disease.
  • premature translation termination refers to the result of a mutation that changes a codon corresponding to an amino acid to a stop codon.
  • nonsense-mediated mRNA decay refers to any mechanism that mediates the decay of mRNAs containing a premature translation termination codon.
  • a "premature termination codon” or “premature stop codon” refers to the occurrence of a stop codon where a codon corresponding to an amino acid should be.
  • a "nonsense mutation” is a point mutation changing a codon corresponding to an amino acid to a stop codon.
  • nonsense suppression refers to the inhibition or suppression of premature translation and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay.
  • modulation of premature translation termination and/or nonsense- mediated mRNA decay refers to the regulation of gene expression by altering the level of nonsense suppression. For example, if it is desirable to increase production of a defective protein encoded by a gene with a premature stop codon, i.e., to permit readthrough of the premature stop codon of the disease gene so translation of the gene can occur, then modulation of premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay entails up-regulation of nonsense suppression. Conversely, if it is desirable to promote the degradation of an mRNA with a premature stop codon, then modulation of premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decays entails down-regulation of nonsense suppression.
  • the term "patient” means an animal (e.g., cow, horse, sheep, pig, chicken, turkey, quail, cat, dog, mouse, rat, rabbit, guinea pig, etc.), preferably a mammal such as a non-primate and a primate (e.g. , monkey and human), most preferably a human.
  • the patient is an infant, child, adolescent or adult.
  • it has been determined through pre-screening that the patient possesses a nonsense mutation, hi another embodiment, it has been determined through pre-screening which non-sense mutation the patient has (i.e., UAA, UGA, or UAG).
  • the patient is infected with bacterial cells (e.g., Pseudomonas aeruginosa).
  • the cells of the patient are virally infected.
  • substituted means a group substituted by one to four or more substituents, such as, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aroyl, cycloalkyl, halo, haloalkyl (e.g., trifluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, fluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, fluoromethoxy), haloalkoxy, hydroxy, alkoxy, cycloalkyoxy, heterocylooxy, oxo, alkanoyl, aryl, aryloxy, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, heterocyclo, alkanoyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, aralkylamino, cycloalkylamino, heterocycloamino, mono and disubstituted
  • CONH 2 substituted carbamyl (e.g., CONH alkyl, CONH aryl, CONH aralkyl or instances where there are two substituents on the nitrogen selected from alkyl, aryl or aralkyl), alkoxycarbonyl, aryl, substituted aryl, guanidino,heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloaryl and substituted heterocycloaryl (such as, indolyl, imidazolyl, furyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, pyrrolidyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl and the like).
  • substituted carbamyl e.g., CONH alkyl, CONH aryl, CONH aralkyl or instances where there are two substituents on the nitrogen selected from alkyl, aryl or aralkyl
  • alkoxycarbonyl aryl, substituted aryl, guanidin
  • substituents themselves are further substituted, such further substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, cycloalkyl, and arylalkyl.
  • alkyl means a saturated straight chain or branched non-cyclic hydrocarbon having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably 1-10 carbon atoms and most preferably 1-4 carbon atoms.
  • saturated straight chain alkyls include -methyl, -ethyl, -n-propyl, -n-butyl, -n-pentyl, -n- hexyl, -n-heptyl, -n-octyl, -n-nonyl and -n-decyl; while saturated branched alkyls include - isopropyl, -sec-butyl, -isobutyl, -tert-butyl, -isopentyl, 2-methylbutyl, 3-methylbutyl, 2- methylpentyl, 3-methylpentyl, 4-methylpentyl, 2-methylhexyl, 3-methylhexyl, 4- methylhexyl, 5-methylhexyl, 2,3-dimethylbutyl, 2,3-dimethylpentyl, 2,4-dimethylpentyl, 2,3-dimethylhexyl, 2,4-dimethyl
  • alkenyl group means a straight chain or branched non-cyclic hydrocarbon having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2-10 carbon atoms, most preferably 2-6 carbon atoms, and including at least one carbon-carbon double bond.
  • Representative straight chain and branched (C 2 -C 10 )alkenyls include -vinyl, -allyl, -1-butenyl, -2-butenyl, -isobutylenyl, -1-pentenyl, -2-pentenyl, -3- methyl-1-butenyl, -2-methyl-2-butenyl, -2,3-dimethyl-2-butenyl, -1-hexenyl, -2-hexenyl, -3- hexenyl, -1-heptenyl, -2-heptenyl, -3-heptenyl, -1-octenyl, -2-octenyl, -3-octenyl, -1- nonenyl, -2-nonenyl, -3-nonenyl, -1-decenyl, -2-decenyl, -3-decenyl and the like.
  • alkynyl group means a straight chain or branched non-cyclic hydrocarbon having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2-10 carbon atoms, most preferably 2-6 carbon atoms, and including at lease one carbon-carbon triple bond.
  • Representative straight chain and branched -(C 2 -C 10 )alkynyls include -acetylenyl, -propynyl, -1-butynyl, -2-butynyl.
  • the triple bond of an alkynyl group can be unconjugated or conjugated to another unsaturated group.
  • An alkynyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • halogen'Or “halo” means fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine.
  • haloalkyl means -alkyl substituted with one or more halogens, wherein alkyl and halogen are defined as above, including -CF3, -CHF2, -CH2F, -CC13, -CHC12, -CBr3, -CHBr2, -CH2CF3, - CH2CHF2, - CH2CH2F, and the like.
  • alkyl sulfonyl means -SO 3 - alkyl, wherein alkyl is defined as above, including -SO 2 -CH 3 , -SO 2 -CH 2 CH 3 , -SO 2 - (CH 2 ) 2 CH 3 , -SO 2 -(CH 2 ) 3 CH 3, -SO 2 -(CH 2 ) 4 CH 3 , -SO 2 -(CH 2 ) 5 CH 3 , and the like.
  • sulfonyl alkyl means -Alkyl- SO H, wherein alkyl is defined as above.
  • carboxyl and “carboxy” mean -COOH or a salt thereof (e.g, -COO " Na + ).
  • alkoxy means -O-(alkyl), wherein alkyl is defined above, including -OCH 3 , -OCH 2 CH 3 , -O(CH 2 ) 2 CH 3) -O(CH 2 ) 3 CH 3, -O(CH 2 ) 4 CH 3 , -O(CH 2 ) 5 CH 3 , and the like.
  • the esters are biohydrolyzable (i.e., the ester is hydrolyzed to a carboxylic acid in vitro or in vivo).
  • haloalkoxy means -alkoxy substituted with one or more halogens, wherein alkoxy and halogen are defined as above, including -OCF3, -OCHF2, - OCH2F, -OCC13, -OCHC12, -OCBr3, -OCHBr2, -OCH2CF3, -OCH2CHF2, -OCH2CH2F, and the like.
  • the esters are biohydrolyzable (i.e., the ester is hydrolyzed to a carboxylic acid in vitro or in vivo).
  • carboxyalky means -(alkyl)- carboxy, wherein alkyl and carboxy are defined above, including -CH2-COOH, -(CH2)2- COOH, -(CH2)3-COOH, -(CH2)4-COOH, and the like.
  • aryl means a carbocychc aromatic ring containing from 5 to 14 ring atoms.
  • the ring atoms of a carbocychc aryl group are all carbon atoms.
  • Aryl ring structures include compounds having one or more ring structures such as mono-, bi-, or tricyclic compounds as well as benzo-fused carbocychc moieties such as 5,6,7,8-tefrahydronaphthyl and the like.
  • the aryl group is a monocyclic ring or bicyclic ring.
  • aryl groups include phenyl, tolyl, anthracenyl, fluorenyl, indenyl, azulenyl, phenanthrenyl and naphthyl.
  • a carbocyclic aryl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • heteroaryl means a carbocyclic aromatic ring containing from 5 to 14 ring atoms and the ring atoms contain at least one heteroatom, preferably 1 to 3 heteroatoms, independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur.
  • Heteroaryl ring structures include compounds having one or more ring structures such as mono-, bi-, or tricyclic compounds as well as fused heterocyclic moities.
  • heteroaryls are triazolyl, tetrazolyl, oxadiazolyl, pyridyl, furyl, benzofuranyl, thiophenyl, benzothiophenyl, benzoisoxazolyl, benzoisothiazolyl, quinolinyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, thiazolyl, benzothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, cimiolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, benzoquinazolinyl, acridinyl, pyrimidyl, oxazolyl, benzo[l,3]dioxole and 2,3-d
  • aryloxy means -O-aryl group, wherein aryl is as defined above.
  • An aryloxy group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • arylalkyl means -(alkyl)-(aryl), wherein alkyl and aryl are defined above, including, but not limited to -(CH 2 )phenyl, - (CH 2 ) 2 phenyl, -(CH 2 ) 3 phenyl, -CH(phenyl) 2 , -CH(phenyl) 3 , -(CH 2 )tolyl, -(CH 2 )anthracenyl, -(CH 2 )fluorenyl, -(CH 2 )indenyl, -(CH 2 )azulenyl, -(CH 2 )naphthyl, and the like.
  • alkylaryl means -(aryl)-(alkyl), wherein alkyl and aryl are defined above, including, but not limited to 2-methyl-phenyl, 3- methyl-phenyl, 4-methyl-phenyl, 5-methyl-phenyl, 2,3-dimethylphenyl, 2,4-dimethyl- phenyl, 2,5-dimethylphenyl, 3,4-dimethyl-phenyl, 3,5-dimethyl-phenyl, 2-ethyl-phenyl, 3- ethyl-phenyl, 4-ethyl-phenyl, 5-ethyl-phenyl, 2-isopropyl-phenyl, 3-isopropyl-phenyl, 4- isopropyl-phenyl, 5-isopropyl-phenyl, 4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenyl, 3-isopropyl-5-methyl- phenyl and the like.
  • alkyl and aryl are defined above, including, but not limited to
  • alkyl (alkyl)-(heteroaryl), wherein alkyl and heteroaryl are defined above, including, but not limited to -(CH 2 )pyridyl, -(CH 2 ) 2 pyridyl, -(CH 2 ) 3 pyridyl, -CH(pyridyl) 2 , -C(pyridyl) 3 , - (CH 2 )triazolyl, -(CH 2 )tetrazolyl, -(CH 2 )oxadiazolyl, -(CH 2 )furyl, -(CH 2 )benzofuranyl, - (CH 2 )thiophenyl, -(CH 2 )benzothiophenyl, and the like.
  • alkylheteroaryl means -( heteroaryl)-( alkyl), wherein heteroaryl and alkyl are defined above, including, but not limited to, -pyridyl-(CH3), -triazolyl-(CH3), -thiazolyl-(CH3), -tetrazolyl-(CH3), - oxadiazolyl-(CH3), -furyl-(CH3), -benzofuranyl-(CH3), -thiophenyl-(CH3), - benzothiophenyl-(CH3), and the like wherein each alkyl group can be further substituted.
  • arylalkyloxy means -O-
  • alkyl (alkyl)-(aryl), wherein alkyl and aryl are defined above, including, but not limited to -O- (CH 2 ) 2 phenyl, -O-(CH 2 ) 3 phenyl, -O-CH(phenyl) 2 , -O-CH(phenyl) 3 , -O-(CH 2 )tolyl, -O- (CH 2 )anthracenyl, -O-(CH 2 )fluorenyl, -O-(CH 2 )indenyl, -O-(CH 2 )azulenyl, -O- (CH 2 )naphthyl, and the like.
  • cycloalkyl means a monocyclic or polycyclic saturated ring comprising carbon and hydrogen atoms and having no carbon-carbon multiple bonds.
  • a cycloalkyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • Examples of cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, (C 3 _C )cycloalkyl groups, including cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cycloheptyl, and saturated cyclic and bicyclic terpenes.
  • a cycloalkyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • the cycloalkyl group is a monocyclic ring or bicyclic ring.
  • heterocyclyl and “heterocyclo” means a monocyclic or polycyclic ring comprising carbon and hydrogen atoms, optionally having 1 or 2 multiple bonds, and the ring atoms contain at least one heteroatom, preferably 1 to 3 heteroatoms, independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur.
  • Heterocyclyl ring structures include compounds having one or more ring structures such as mono-, bi-, or tricylic compounds.
  • the heterocyclyl group is a monocyclic ring or bicyclic ring.
  • heterocycles include, but are not limited to morpholinyl, pyrrolidinonyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, hydantoinyl, valerolactamyl, t _ ⁇ ⁇ _ _ oxiranyl, oxetanyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetraliydropyranyl, tetrahydropyridinyl, tefrahydroprimidinyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, and the like.
  • a heterocyclyl ring can be unsubstituted or substituted.
  • cycloalkyloxy means -O- (cycloalkyl), wherein cycloalkyl is defined above, including -O-cyclopropyl, -O-cyclobutyl, -O-cyclopentyl, -O-cyclohexyl, -O-cycloheptyl and the like.
  • cycloalkylalkyloxy means -O- (alkyl)-(cycloalkyl), wherein cycloalkyl and alkyl are defined above, including, but not limited to -O-cyclopropyl, -O-cyclobutyl, -O-cyclopentyl, -O-cyclohexyl, -O-cycloheptyl and the like.
  • heterocycloalkyl means - (alkyl)-(heterocyclo), wherein heterocyclo and alkyl are defined above, including, but not limited to -CH2-morpholinyl, -CH2-pyrrolidinonyl, -CH2-pyrrolidinyl, -(CH2)2- piperidinyl, -(CH2)3 -piperidinyl, -(CH2)4-piperidinyl, -CH2-hydantoinyl and the like.
  • aminoalkoxy means -O-
  • alkyl (alkyl)-NH2, wherein alkyl is defined above, including, but not limited to -O-CH 2 -NH 2 , -O- (CH 2 ) 2 -NH 2 , -O-(CH 2 ) 3 -NH 2 , -O-(CH 2 ) 4 -NH 2 , -O-(CH 2 ) 5 -NH 2 , and the like.
  • alkylamino means -NH(alkyl) or -N(alkyl)(alkyl), wherein alkyl is defined above, including, but not limited to NHCH 3 , - NHCH 2 CH 3 , -NH(CH 2 ) 2 CH 3 , -NH(CH 2 ) 3 CH 3 , -NH(CH 2 ) CH 3 , -NH(CH 2 ) 5 CH 3 , -N(CH 3 ) 2 , - N(CH 2 CH 3 ) 2 , -N((CH 2 ) 2 CH 3 ) 2 , -N(CH 3 )(CH 2 CH 3 ), and the like.
  • arylamino means -NH(aryl), wherein aryl is defined above, including, but not limited to -NH(phenyl), -NH(tolyl), - NH(anthracenyl), -NH(fluorenyl), -NH(indenyl), -NH(azulenyl), -NH(pyridinyl), - NH(naphthyl), and the like.
  • arylalkylamino means -NH- (alkyl)-(aryl), wherein alkyl and aryl are defined above, including -NH-CH 2 -(phenyl), -NH- CH 2 -(tolyl), -NH-CH 2 -(anthracenyl), -NH-CH 2 -(fluorenyl), -NH-CH 2 -(indenyl), -NH-CH 2 - (azulenyl), -NH-CH 2 -(pyridinyl), -NH-CH 2 -(naphthyl), -NH-(CH 2 ) 2 -( ⁇ henyl) and the like.
  • cycloalkylamino means -NH-NH-NH-
  • cycloalkyl wherein cycloalkyl is defined above, including -NH-cyclopropyl, -NH- cyclobutyl, -NH-cyclopentyl, -NH-cyclohexyl, -NH-cycloheptyl, and the like.
  • aminoalkyl means -(alkyl)- NH 2 , wherein alkyl is defined above, including -CH 2 -NH 2 , -(CH 2 )2-NH 2 , -(CH 2 ) 3 -NH 2 , - (CH 2 ) 4 -NH 2 , -(CH 2 ) 5 -NH 2 and the like.
  • alkylaminoalkyi means - (alkyl)-NH(alkyl) or -(alkyl)-N(alkyl)(alkyl), wherein each "alkyl” is independently an alkyl group defined above, including -CH 2 -NH-CH 3 , -CH 2 -NHCH 2 CH 3 , -CH 2 - NH(CH 2 ) 2 CH 3 , -CH 2 -NH(CH 2 ) 3 CH 3 , -CH 2 -NH(CH 2 ) 4 CH 3 , -CH 2 -NH(CH 2 ) 5 CH 3 , -(CH 2 ) 2 - NH-CH 3 , -CH 2 -N(CH 3 ) 2 , -CH2-N(CH 2 CH 3 )2, -CH 2 -N((CH 2 )2CH 3 ) 2 , -CH 2 - N(CH 3 )(CH 2 CH 3 ),
  • a "therapeutically effective amount” refers to that amount of the compound of the invention or other active ingredient sufficient to provide a therapeutic benefit in the treatment or management of the disease or to delay or minimize symptoms associated with the disease.
  • a therapeutically effective amount with respect to a compound of the invention means that amount of therapeutic agent alone, or in combination with other therapies, that provides a therapeutic benefit in the treatment or management of the disease. Used in connection with an amount of a compound of the invention, the term can encompass an amount that improves overall therapy, reduces or avoids symptoms or causes of disease, or enhances the therapeutic efficacy of or synergies with another therapeutic agent.
  • a prophylactically effective amount refers to that amount of a compound of the invention or other active ingredient sufficient to result in the prevention, recurrence or spread of the disease.
  • a prophylactically effective amount may refer to the amount sufficient to prevent initial disease or the recurrence or spread of the disease or the occurrence of the disease in a patient, including but not limited to those predisposed to the disease.
  • a prophylactically effective amount may also refer to the amount that provides a prophylactic benefit in the prevention of the disease.
  • a prophylactically effective amount with respect to a compound of the invention means that amount alone, or in combination with other agents, that provides a prophylactic benefit in the prevention of the disease. Used in connection with an amount of a compound of the invention, the term can encompass an amount that improves overall prophylaxis or enhances the prophylactic efficacy of or synergies with another prophylactic agent.
  • a "therapeutic protocol” refers to a regimen of timing and dosing of one or more therapeutic agents.
  • a “prophylactic protocol” refers to a regimen of timing and dosing of one or more prophylactic agents.
  • a “protocol” includes dosing schedules and dosing regimens.
  • in combination refers to the use of more than one prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents.
  • a subject is administered one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents to "manage” a disease so as to prevent the progression or worsening of the disease.
  • the terms "prevent”, “preventing” and “prevention” refer to the prevention of the onset, recurrence, or spread of the disease in a subject resulting from the administration of a prophylactic or therapeutic agent.
  • the terms “treat”, “treating” and “treatment” refer to the eradication or amelioration of the disease or symptoms associated with the disease. In certain embodiments, such terms refer to minimizing the spread or worsening of the disease resulting from the administration of one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents to a subject with such a disease.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salts refer to salts prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic acids or bases including inorganic acids and bases and organic acids and bases.
  • suitable pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts for the compound of the present invention include, but are not limited to, metallic salts made from aluminum, calcium, lithium, magnesium, potassium, sodium and zinc or organic salts made from lysine, N,N'-dibenzylethylenediamine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, meglumine (N-methylglucamine) and procaine.
  • Suitable non-toxic acids include, but are not limited to, inorganic and organic acids such as acetic, alginic, anthranilic, benzenesulfonic, benzoic, camphorsulfonic, citric, ethenesulfonic, formic, fumaric, furoic, galacturonic, gluconic, glucuronic, glutamic, glycolic, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, isethionic, lactic, maleic, malic, mandelic, methanesulfonic, mucic, nitric, pamoic, pantothenic, phenylacetic, phosphoric, propionic, salicylic, stearic, succinic, sulfanilic, sulfuric, tartaric acid, and p-toluenesulfonic acid.
  • inorganic and organic acids such as acetic, alginic, anthranilic, benzenesulfonic, benzoic, camphorsulfonic
  • Specific non-toxic acids include hydrochloric, hydrobromic, phosphoric, sulfuric, and methanesulfonic acids.
  • Examples of specific salts thus include hydrochloride and mesylate salts.
  • Other examples of salts are well known in the art, see, e.g., Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990).
  • polymorph refers to solid crystalline forms of a compound of the present invention or complex thereof. Different polymo ⁇ hs of the same compound can exhibit different physical, chemical and/or spectroscopic properties. Different physical properties include, but are not limited to stability (e.g., to heat or light), compressibility and density (important in formulation and product manufacturing), and dissolution rates (which can affect bioavailability).
  • Differences in stability can result from changes in chemical reactivity (e.g., differential oxidation, such that a dosage form discolors more rapidly when comprised of one polymo ⁇ h than when comprised of another polymo ⁇ h) or mechanical characteristics (e.g., tablets crumble on storage as a kinetically favored polymo ⁇ h converts to thennodynamically more stable polymo ⁇ h) or both (e.g., tablets of one polymo ⁇ h are more susceptible to breakdown at high humidity).
  • Different physical properties of polymo ⁇ hs can affect their processing. For example, one polymo ⁇ h might be more likely to form solvates or might be more difficult to filter or wash free of impurities than another due to, for example, the shape or size distribution of particles of it.
  • hydrate means a compound of the present invention or a salt thereof, that further includes a stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amount of water bound by non-covalent intermolecular forces.
  • clathrate means a compound of the present invention or a salt thereof in the fonn of a crystal lattice that contains spaces (e.g., channels) that have a guest molecule (e.g., a solvent or water) trapped within.
  • spaces e.g., channels
  • guest molecule e.g., a solvent or water
  • prodrug means a derivative of a compound that can hydrolyze, oxidize, or otherwise react under biological conditions (in vitro or in vivo) to provide an active compound, particularly a compound of the invention.
  • prodrugs include, but are not limited to, derivatives and metabolites of a compound of the invention that include biohydrolyzable moieties such as biohydrolyzable amides, biohydrolyzable esters, biohydrolyzable carbamates, biohydrolyzable carbonates, biohydrolyzable ureides, and biohydrolyzable phosphate analogues.
  • prodrugs of compounds with carboxyl functional groups are the lower alkyl esters of the carboxylic acid.
  • the carboxylate esters are conveniently formed by esterifying any of the carboxylic acid moieties present on the molecule.
  • Prodrugs can typically be prepared using well-known methods, such as those described by Burger 's Medicinal Chemistry and Drug Discovery 6th ed. (Donald J. Abraham ed., 2001, Wiley) and£>e5?g77 and Application of Prodrugs (H. Bundgaard erf., 1985, Harwood Academic Publishers Gmfh).
  • biohydrolyzable amide means an amide, ester, carbamate, carbonate, ureide, or phosphate, respectively, of a compound that either: 1) does not interfere with the biological activity of the compound but can confer upon that compound advantageous properties in vivo, such as uptake, duration of action, or onset of action; or 2) is biologically inactive but is converted in vivo to the biologically active compound.
  • biohydrolyzable esters include, but are not limited to, lower alkyl esters, alkoxyacyloxy esters, alkyl acylamino alkyl esters, and choline esters.
  • biohydrolyzable amides include, but are not limited to, lower alkyl amides, ⁇ -amino acid amides, alkoxyacyl amides, and alkylaminoalkylcarbonyl amides.
  • biohydrolyzable carbamates include, but are not limited to, lower alkylamines, substituted ethylenediamines, aminoacids, hydroxyalkylamines, heterocyclic and heteroaromatic amines, and polyether amines.
  • optically pure or “stereomerically pure” means a the stereoisomer of a compound is substantially free of the other stereoisomers of that compound.
  • a stereomerically pure compound having one chiral center will be substantially free of the opposite enantiomer of the compound.
  • a stereomerically pure compound having two chiral centers will be substantially free of other diastereomers of the compound.
  • a typical stereomerically pure compound comprises greater than about 80% by weight of one stereoisomer of the compound and less than about 20% by weight of other stereoisomers of the compound, more preferably greater than about 90% by weight of one stereoisomer of the compound and less than about 10% by weight of the other stereoisomers of the compound, even more preferably greater than about 95% by weight of one stereoisomer of the compound and less than about 5% by weight of the other stereoisomers of the compound, and most preferably greater than about 97% by weight of one stereoisomer of the compound and less than about 3% by weight of the other stereoisomers of the compound.
  • enantiomerically pure means a stereomerically pure composition of a compound having one chiral center.
  • the depicted structure is to be accorded more weight.
  • the stereochemistry of a structure or a portion of a structure is not indicated with, for example, bold or dashed lines, the structure or portion of the structure is to be inte ⁇ reted as encompassing all stereoisomers of it.
  • This invention includes acetylamino benzoic acid compounds of formula I:
  • X is oxygen, sulfur, CO, SO or S(O) 2 ;
  • Y is oxygen or sulfur;
  • Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or xmsubstituted cycloalkyl; n is an integer from 0 to 4;
  • R 1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO 2 R 7 , CF 3 , CN, COOH, COR 7 , or COOR 7 ;
  • R° is hydrogen, or taken together with R 1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring;
  • R 6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R 7 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF 3 ; with the proviso that when X is O, Y is O, n is 0 and R 1 is hydrogen, then Z is not 4- chlor
  • This invention further encompasses acetylamino benzoic acid compounds of the formula II:
  • X is oxygen or sulfur
  • Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, halogen, SO 2 R 7 , CF 3 , COOH, COR 7 , or COOR 7 ;
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 and R 5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF 3 , OCF 3 , OCHF 2 , CN, COOH, COOR 7 , SO 2 R 7 , NO 2 , NH 2 , or NR 7 2 ; and
  • R 6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R 7 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF 3 ; with the proviso that when X is O and R 1 is hydrogen, then Z is not 4-chlorophenyl, 4-methylphenyl
  • This invention further encompasses acetylamino benzoic acid compounds of the formula III:
  • Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
  • R 1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO 2 R 2 ,CF 3 , CN, COOH, COR 2 , or COOR 2 ; R is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen,
  • R 6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R 2 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF 3 ; with the proviso that when R 1 is hydrogen, then Z is not 4-chlorophenyl, 4- methylphenyl, 3-chlor
  • R is not hydrogen.
  • Z is 4-isopropyl-3 -methylphenyl, 3 -isopropyl-5 -methylphenyl, 2'-methyl-biphenyl-4-yl, 3'-methyl-biphenyl-4-yl, 4-propyl- phenyl, 4-(l,l-dimethyl-propyl)-phenyl, 5,6,7,8,-tetrahydronaphthalen-2-yl, 4-tert-butyl- phenyl, 4-cyclopentyl-phenyl, or 4-trifluoromethoxyphenyl, more preferably, Z is 4- isopropyl-3 -methylphenyl, 3-isopropyl-5-methylphenyl, 2'-methyl-biphenyl-4-yl, 3'- methyl-biphenyl-4-yl, 4-propyl-phenyl, 4-(l,l-dimethyl-propyl)
  • Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
  • R° and R 1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5- 7 membered heterocyclicor heteroaryl ring;
  • R is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, ⁇ _ _ substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF 3 , OCF 3 , OCHF 2 , CN, COOR 2 , SO 2 , NO 2 , NH 2 , or NR 2 2 ;
  • R 6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occunence of R 2 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or xmsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF 3 .
  • Preferred compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to,
  • Potency and efficacy activities are ranked as either extremely high, very high or significant. The combination of these activities is used to determine the activity ranking.
  • Compounds which were found to have both extremely high potency and extremely high efficacy of protein synthesis are classified as "*****”
  • Compounds which were found to have extremely high potency of protein synthesis and very high efficacy were classified as "****”.
  • Compounds which were found to have very high potency of protein synthesis and extremely high efficacy were classified as "**** »
  • Compounds which were found to have both very high potency and very high efficacy of protein synthesis are classified as "***”.
  • Compounds which were found to have very high potency of protein synthesis and significant efficacy were classified as "**”.
  • Compounds which were found to have significant potency of protein synthesis and very high efficacy were classified as "**”.
  • compounds which were found to have significant potency of protein synthesis and very high efficacy were classified as "*”.
  • the present invention encompasses the in vitro or in vivo use of a compound of the invention, and the inco ⁇ oration of a compoxmd of the invention into pharmaceutical compositions and single unit dosage forms useful in the treatment and prevention of a variety of diseases and disorders.
  • Specific diseases and disorders include those ameliorated by the suppression of a nonsense mutation in messenger RNA.
  • compositions including dosage forms of the invention which comprise a compound of the invention or a pharmaceutically acceptable polymo ⁇ h,tician _ ,_ ti ⁇ ⁇ prodrug, salt, clathrate, solvate or hydrate thereof, can be used in the methods of the invention.
  • a first embodiment of the invention relates to a method of modulating premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay comprising contacting a cell exhibiting a nonsense mutation with an effective amount of a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug, metabolite, polymo ⁇ h, salt, solvate, hydrate, or clathrate thereof.
  • the invention relates to a method of inducing nonsense suppression comprising contacting a cell exhibiting a nonsense mutation with an effective amount of a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug, metabolite, polymo ⁇ h, salt, solvate, hydrate, or clathrate thereof.
  • BIOLOGICAL ASSAYS AND ANIMAL STUDIES Compounds that modulate premature translation termination and or nonsense- mediated mRNA decay can be identified by a number of techniques. For example, methods for screening compounds that modulate the post-transcriptional expression of any gene with a premature translation stop codon are described in International Patent Publication No. WO 01/44516 A2, inco ⁇ orated herein in its entirety by reference.
  • a mRNA with a premature termination codon is franslated in vitro and is used to screen a library of test compounds.
  • the mRNA with a premature termination codon is a reporter gene with a premature termination codon.
  • the first assay is a cell-based luciferase reporter assay and the second is a biochemical assay consisting of rabbit reticulocyte lysate and a nonsense-containing luciferase reporter mRNA.
  • a luciferase reporter construct containing a UGA premature termination codon was stably fransfected in 293T Human Embryonic Kidney cells.
  • mRNA containing a UGA premature termination codon was used as a reporter in an in vitro translation reaction using rabbit reticulocyte lysate supplemented with tRNA, hemin, creatine kinase, amino acids, KOAc, Mg(OAc)2, and creatine phosphate.
  • Translation of the mRNA was initiated within a virus ___ , _ >t _ derived leader sequence, which significantly reduced the cost of the assay because capped RNA was not required.
  • Synthetic mRNA was prepared in vitro using the T7 promoter and the MegaScript in vitro transcription kit (Ambion). hi both of the biochemical and cell- based assays, addition of gentamicin, a small molecule known to allow readthrough of premature termination codons, resulted in increased luciferase activity and was, therefore, used as an internal standard.
  • Animal model systems can also be used to demonstrate the safety and efficacy of compounds of formula I, II, HI, IV or V.
  • the compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V can be tested for biological activity using animal models for a disease, condition, or syndrome of interest. These include animals engineered to contain the target RNA element coupled to a functional readout system, such as a transgenic mouse.
  • Examples of animal models for cystic fibrosis include, but are not limited to, cftr(-/-) mice (see, e.g., Freedman et al, 2001, Gasfroenterology 121(4):950-7), cftr(tmlHGU/tmlHGU) mice (see, e.g., Bernhard et al, 2001, Exp Lung Res 27(4):349- 66), CFTR-deficient mice with defective cAMP-mediated Cl(-) conductance (see, e.g., Stotland et al, 2000, Pediafr Pulmonol 30(5):413-24), and C57BL/6- Cffr(mlUNC)/Cftr(mlUNC) knockout mice (see, e.g., Stotland et al, 2000, Pediafr Pulmonol 30(5):413-24).
  • Examples of animal models for muscular dystrophy include, but are not limited to, mouse, hamster, cat, dog, and C. elegans.
  • Examples of mouse models for muscular dystrophy include, but are not limited to, the dy-/- mouse (see, e.g., Connolly et al, 2002, J Neuroimmunol 127(l-2):80-7), a muscular dystrophy with myositis (mdm) mouse mutation (see, e.g., Garvey et al, 2002, Genomics 79(2): 146-9), the mdx mouse (see, e.g., Nakamura et al, 2001, Neuromuscul Disord 11(3):251-9), the utrophin-dystrophin knockout (dko) mouse (see, e.g., Nakamura et al, 2001, Nexxromuscul Disord 11(3):251-9), the dy/dy mouse (see, e.
  • Examples of hamster models for muscular dystrophy include, but are not limited to, sarcoglycan-deficient hamsters (see, e.g., Nakamura et al, 2001, Am J Physiol Cell Physiol 281(2):C690-9) and the BIO 14.6 dystrophic hamster (see, e.g., Schlenker & Burbach, 1991, J Appl Physiol 71(5):1655-62).
  • An example of a feline model for muscular dystrophy includes, but is not limited to, the hypertrophic feline muscular dystrophy model (see, e.g., Gaschen & Burgunder, 2001, Acta Neuropathol (Berl) 101(6):591-600).
  • Canine models for muscular dystrophy include, but are not limited to, golden retriever muscular dystrophy (see, e.g., Fletcher et al, 2001, Neuromuscul Disord ll(3):239-43) and canine X-linked muscular dystrophy (see, e.g., Valentine et al, 1992, Am J Med Genet 42(3):352-6).
  • golden retriever muscular dystrophy see, e.g., Fletcher et al, 2001, Neuromuscul Disord ll(3):239-43
  • canine X-linked muscular dystrophy see, e.g., Valentine et al, 1992, Am J Med Genet 42(3):352-6).
  • Examples of C. elegans models for muscular dystrophy are described in Chamberlain & Benian, 2000, Cun Biol 10(21):R795-7 and Culette & Sattelle, 2000, Hum Mol Genet 9(6): 869-77.
  • mice lacking functional LDL receptor genes see, e.g., Aji et al, 1997, Circulation 95(2):430-7
  • Yoshida rats see, e.g., Fantappie et al, 1992, Life Sci 50(24):1913-24
  • the JCR:LA-cp rat see, e.g., Richardson et al, 1998, Atherosclerosis 138(l):135-46
  • swine see, e.g., Hasler-Rapacz et al, 1998, Am J Med Genet 76(5):379- 86
  • Watanabe heritable hyperlipidaemic rabbit see, e.g., Tsutsumi et al, 2000, Arzneiffenforschung 50(2):118-21; Harsch et al, 1998, Br J Pharmacol 124(2):227-82; and Tanaka et al,
  • an animal model for human cancer in general includes, but is not limited to, spontaneously occurring tumors of companion animals (see, e.g., Nail & MacEwen, 2000, Cancer Invest 18(8):781-92).
  • animal models for lung cancer include, but are not limited to, lung cancer animal models described by Zhang & Roth (1994, In Vivo 8(5):755-69) and a transgenic mouse model with disrupted p53 function (see, e.g., Morris et al, 1998, J La State Med Soc 150(4): 179-85).
  • An example of an animal model for breast cancer includes, but is not limited to, a transgenic mouse that overexpresses cyclin DI (see, e.g., Hosokawa et al, 2001, Transgenic Res 10(5):471-8).
  • An example of an animal model for colon cancer includes, but is not limited to, a TCRbeta and p53 double knockout mouse (see, e.g., Kado et al, 2001, Cancer Res 61(6):2395-8).
  • animal models for pancreatic cancer include, but are not limited to, a metastatic model of Panc02 murine pancreatic adenocarcinoma (see, e.g., Wang et al, 2001, Int J Pancreatol 29(l):37-46) and nu-nu mice generated in subcutaneous pancreatic tumours (see, e.g., Ghaneh et al, 2001, Gene Ther 8(3): 199-208).
  • animal models for non-Hodgkin's lymphoma include, but are not limited to, a severe combined immunodeficiency ("SCID") mouse (see, e.g.
  • SCID severe combined immunodeficiency
  • an animal model for esophageal cancer includes, but is not limited to, a mouse transgenic for the human papillomavirus type 16 E7 oncogene (see, e.g., Herber et al, 1996, J Nirol 70(3): 1873-81).
  • animal models for colorectal carcinomas include, but are not limited to, Ape mouse models (see, e.g., Fodde & Smits, 2001, Trends Mol Med 7(8):369-73 and Kuraguchi et al, 2000, Oncogene 19(50):5755-63).
  • An example of an animal model for neurofibromatosis includes, but is not limited to, mutant NF1 mice (see, e.g., Cichowski et al, 1996, Semin Cancer Biol 7(5):291- 8).
  • animal models for retinoblastoma include, but are not limited to, transgenic mice that expression the simian virus 40 T antigen in the retina (see, e.g., Howes et al, 1994, Invest Ophthahnol Vis Sci 35(2):342-51 and Windle et al, 1990, Nature 343(6259):665-9) and inbred rats (see, e.g., Nishida et al, 1981, Curr Eye Res l(l):53-5 and Kobayasbi et al, 1982, Acta Neuropathol (Berl) 57(2-3) :203-8).
  • Examples of animal models for Wilm's tumor include, but are not limited to, a WTl knockout mice (see, e.g., Scharnhorst et al, 1997, Cell Growth Differ 8(2):133-43), a rat subline with a high incidence of neuphroblastoma (see, e.g., Mesfin & Breech, 1996, Lab Anim Sci 46(3):321- 6), and a Wistar/Furth rat with Wilms' tumor (see, e.g., Mu ⁇ hy et al, 1987, Anticancer Res 7(4B):717-9).
  • Examples of animal models for retinitis pigmentosa include, but are not limited to, the Royal College of Surgeons ("RCS") rat (see, e.g., Nollrath et al, 2001, Proc ⁇ atl Acad Sci USA 98(22);12584-9 and Hanitzsch et al, 1998, Acta Anat (Basel) 162(2-3): 119-26), a rhodopsin knockout mouse (see, e.g., Jaissle et al, 2001, Invest Ophthahnol Vis Sci 42(2):506-13), and Wag/Rij rats (see, e.g., Lai et al, 1980, Am J Pathol 98(l):281-4).
  • RCS Royal College of Surgeons
  • animal models for cirrhosis include, but are not limited to, CC1 4 - exposed rats (see, e.g., Kloehn et al, 2001, Horm Mexab Res 33(7):394-401) and rodent models instigated by bacterial cell components or colitis (see, e.g., Nierling, 2001, Best Pract Res Clin Gastroenterol 15(4):591-610).
  • animal models for hemophilia include, but are not limited to, rodent models for hemophilia A (see, e.g. , Reipert et al, 2000, Thromb Haemost 84(5):826-32; Jarvis et al,.
  • Examples of animal models for von Willebrand disease include, but are not limited to, an inbred mouse strain RHIS/J (see, e.g., Nichols et al, 1994, 83(11):3225-31 and Sweeney et al, 1990, 76(11):2258-65), rats injected with botrocetin (see, e.g., Sanders et al, 1988, Lab Invest 59(4):443-52), and porcine models for von Willebrand disease (see, e.g., Nichols et al, 1995, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 92(7):2455-9; Johnson & Bowie, 1992, J Lab Clin Med 120(4):553-8); and Brinkhous et al, 1991, Mayo Clin Proc 66(7):733-42).
  • animal models for b-thalassemia include, but are not limited to, murine models with mutations in globin genes (see, e.g., Lewis et al, 1998, Blood 91(6):2152-6; Raja et al, 1994, Br J Haematol 86(1): 156-62; Popp et al, 1985, 445:432-44; and Skow et al, 1983, Cell 34(3): 1043-52).
  • kidney stones examples include, but are not limited to, genetic hypercalciuric rats (see, e.g., Bushinsky et al, 1999, Kidney hit 55(l):234-43 and Bushinsky et al, 1995, Kidney hit 48(6): 1705-13), chemically treated rats (see, e.g., Grases et al, 1998, Scand J Urol Nephrol 32(4):261-5; Burgess et al, 1995, Urol Res 23(4):239- 42; Kumar et al, 1991, J Urol 146(5):1384-9; Okada et al, 1985, Hinyokika Kiyo
  • animal models for ataxia-telangiectasia include, but are not limited to, murine models of ataxia-telangiectasia (see, e.g., Barlow et al, 1999, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 96(17):9915-9 and Inoue et al, 1986, Cancer Res 46(8):3979-82).
  • animal models for lysosomal storage diseases include, but are not limited to, mouse models for mucopolysaccharidosis type Nil (see, e.g., Brooks et al, 2002, Proc ⁇ atl Acad Sci U S A. 99(9):6216-21 ; Monroy et al, 2002, Bone 30(2):352-9; Nogler et al, 2001, Pediafr Dev Pathol. 4(5):421-33; Nogler et al, 2001, Pediafr Res. 49(3):342-8; and Wolfe et al., 2000, Mol Ther.
  • mice model for metachromatic leukodystrophy see, e.g., Matzner et al, 2002, Gene Ther. 9(l):53-63
  • a mouse model of Sandhoff disease see, e.g., Sango et al, 2002, ⁇ europathol Appl ⁇ eurobiol.
  • mice for mucopolysaccharidosis type III A (see, e.g., Bhattacharyya et al., 2001, Glycobiology 11(1):99-10 and Bhaumik et al., 1999, Glycobiology 9(12): 1389-96.), arylsulfatase A (ASA)-deficient mice (see, e.g., D'Hooge et al, 1999, Brain Res. 847(2):352-6 and D'Hooge et al, 1999, ⁇ eurosci Lett.
  • ASA arylsulfatase A
  • mice with an aspartylglucosaminuria mutation see, e.g., Jalanko et al, 1998, Hum Mol Genet. 7(2):265- 72
  • feline models of mucopolysaccharidosis type VI see, e.g-., Crawley et al, 1998, J Clin Invest. 101(1):109-19 and Norrdin et al., 1995, Bone 17(5):485-9
  • a feline model of Niemann-Pick disease type C see, e.g., March et al, 1997, Acta Neuropathol (Berl ).
  • TSC tuberous sclerosis
  • TSC1 mouse model of TSC 1
  • Tscl TSC1 homologue
  • TSC2 gene mutant(Eker) rat model see, e.g., Hino 2000, Nippon Rinsho 58(6):1255-61; Mizuguchi et al, 2000, J Neuropathol Exp Neurol.
  • the compounds of the invention can be obtained via standard, well-known synthetic methodology, see e.g. March, J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992. Some convenient methods are illustrated in Schemes 1 and 2. Starting materials useful for preparing the compounds of the invention and intermediates therefor, are commercially available or can be prepared from commercially available materials using known synthetic methods and reagents.
  • a compound of structure Al is coupled to an alcohol (or thiol) reagent A2.
  • the group L represents a leaving group of some sort, and can include (but is not limited to) halide, alkylsulfonate, arylsulfonate, diazonium, etc.
  • Typical alkylation conditions for the coulpling of Al and A2 might include the presence of a basic reagent as a catalyst.
  • Basic reagents that are useful here include trialkylamines, sodium or potassium carbonate, sodium hydride, etc.
  • L can also include hydroxy, which can be activated in-situ using conditions such as those employed in the Mitsonobu reaction (typically, use of a trisubstituted phosphine reagent in conjunction with an azodicarboxylate compound).
  • An alternative method involves the coupling of aniline compoxmd 3 with the reagent 4.
  • L' may also be OH, and the reaction is then a peptide-type coupling which is familiar to those skilled in the art.
  • Such reactions are mediated by in-situ activation with reagents such as dialkylcarbodiimide, carbonyldiimidazole or isobutylchloroformate.
  • Modifications of the carboxyl group may be performed at any time in the synthesis which proves compatible with the substrate and chemistry.
  • R 6 is not H
  • the ester can be cleaved to the free carbox ylate using a number of standard methods. This includes (but is not limited to) sodium or potassium hydroxide, lithium iodide, boron tribromide, fluoride reagents (for certain silicon-bearing R 6 groups) and catalytic hydrogenation (for certain benzyl-type R 6 groups).
  • the compound may also be attached through the carboxylate group to a solid-phase resin, which facilitates the synthesis by allowing easy removal of impurities and byproducts from each reaction by simple filtration and washing with an appropriate solvent. Cleavage of the product from the resin may then be accomplished in various ways to afford the final
  • a compound of formula CI is prepared using methods described above.
  • the carbonyl bond may then be thiolated using an appropriate thiolating reagent, such as Lawesson's reagent or phosphorus pentasulfide, typically in inert solvents at elevated temperature.
  • an appropriate thiolating reagent such as Lawesson's reagent or phosphorus pentasulfide
  • the amide nifrogen atom of the unsubstituted compound C2 may be alkylated using an alkylating agent C3 (wherein L" is a leaving group such as halide or alkyl or arylsulfonate) basic reagent such as sodium hydride or potassium hexamethyldisilazane in polar aprotic solvents at temperatures ranging from sub-ambient to heated.
  • alkylating agent C3 wherein L" is a leaving group such as halide or alkyl or arylsulfonate
  • basic reagent such as sodium hydride or potassium hexamethyldisilazane in polar aprotic solvents at temperatures ranging from sub-ambient to heated.
  • Nitration conditions typically include concentrated nitric acid or sodium nitrite optionally in the presence of a , _ u . .,,,,,, , , deliberately, ] ⁇ sulfuric acid.
  • the nitro group of compound D2 may be reduced to an aniline, using conditions such as catalytic hydrogenation or the use of reducing agents such as tin (II) dichloride, iron powder or sodium hydrosulfite.
  • the aniline compound may then be functionahzed as desired (if Rl is not H) to afford compound A3.
  • Alkylation reactions may be used, employing appropriate alkylating reagents such as alkyl halides, etc. and bases.
  • Anilines may also be functionahzed by reductive alkylations, whereby an intermediate Schiff base compound (formed by condensation of the aniline with an aldehyde or ketone reagent) is reduced in situ (typically by catalytic hydrogenation or reagents such as sodium cyanoborohydride).
  • An alternative route involves the reaction of the lithium reagent D3 with an carboxylating reagent to give the compound A3.
  • the nitrogen atom in compound D3 must usually be protected with group P, which can include pivaloyl or tert- butoxycarbonyl.
  • group P can include pivaloyl or tert- butoxycarbonyl.
  • the 3-lithio reagent may be generated by direct deprotonation for some substrates using strong bases such as sec- or tert-butyllithium at temperatures typically ranging slightly below to at ambient.
  • the lithium reagent may also be generated by lithium- halogen exchange from the bromo or iodo analogue and an alkyllithium reagent, usually at reduced temperatures.
  • Carboxylating reagents that are useful here include solid carbon dioxide or an alkyl chloroformate. After the carboxylation, the protecting group P may be removed by methods specific to the group employed, well-known in the area of protecting group chemistry.
  • the invention encompasses methods of treating and preventing diseases or disorders ameliorated by the suppression of premature translation termination and/or nonsense- mediated mRNA decay in a patient which comprise administering to a patient in need of such treatment or prevention a therapeutically effective amount of a compoxmd of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug, solvate, metabolite, polymo ⁇ h, salt, solvate, hydrate, or clathrate thereof.
  • the present invention encompasses the treatment or prevention of any disease which is associated with a gene exhibiting premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay.
  • the disease is due, in part, to the lack of expression of the gene resulting from a premature stop codon.
  • Specific examples of genes which may exhibit premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay and diseases associated with premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay are found in U.S. Patent Application No. 60/390,747, titled: Methods For Identifying Small Molecules That Modulate Premature Translation Termination And Nonsense Mediated mRNA Decay, filed June 21, 2002, which is inco ⁇ orated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • Diseases ameliorated by the suppression of premature translation termination and or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay include, but are not limited to: a genetic disease, cancer, an autoimmune disease, a blood disease, a collagen disease, diabetes, a neurodegenerative disease, a proliferative disease, a cardiovascular disease, a pulmonary disease, an inflammatory disease or central nervous system disease.
  • Specific genetic diseases within the scope of the methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, amyloidosis, hemophilia, Alzheimer's disease, Tay Sachs disease, atherosclerosis, giantism, dwarfism, hypothyroidism, hyperthyroidism, aging, obesity, Parkinson's disease, Niemann Pick's disease, cystic fibrosis, muscular dystrophy, heart disease, kidney stones, ataxia-telangiectasia, familial hypercholesterolemia, retinitis pigmentosa, lysosomal storage disease, tuberous sclerosis, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, and Marfan syndrome. Both solid tumor and other cancers are included within the methods of the invention.
  • the genetic disease is an autoimmune disease.
  • the autoimmune disease is rheumatoid arthritis or graft versus host disease.
  • the genetic disease is a blood disease.
  • the blood disease is hemophilia, Von Willebrand disease, ataxia- telangiectasia, b-thalassemia or kidney stones.
  • the genetic disease is a collagen disease.
  • the collagen disease is osteogenesis imperfecta or cirrhosis.
  • the genetic disease is diabetes. ⁇ ⁇ personally administrating .
  • the genetic disease is an inflammatory disease. In a preferred embodiment, the inflammatory disease is arthritis.
  • the genetic disease is a central nervous system disease.
  • the central nervous system disease is a neurodegenerative disease.
  • the central nervous system disease is multiple sclerosis, muscular dystrophy, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, Alzheimer's disease, Tay Sachs disease, late infantile neuronal ceroid lipofuscinosis (LINCL) or Parkinson's disease.
  • the genetic disease is cancer.
  • the cancer is of the head and neck, eye, skin, mouth, throat, esophagus, chest, bone, lung, colon, sigmoid, rectum, stomach, prostate, breast, ovaries, kidney, liver, pancreas, brain, intestine, heart or adrenals.
  • the cancer is associated with the p53 gene.
  • Nonsense mutations have been identified in the p53 gene and have been implicated in cancer.
  • Several nonsense mutations in the p53 gene have been identified (see, e.g., Masuda et al, 2000, Tokai J Exp Clin Med. 25(2):69-77; Oh et al, 2000, Mol Cells 10(3):275-80; Li et al, 2000, Lab Invest. 80(4):493-9; Yang et al, 1999, Zhonghua Zhong Liu Za Zhi 21(2):114-8; Finkelstein et al, 1998, Mol Diagn. 3(1):37-41; Kajiyama et al, 1998, Dis Esophagus.
  • diseases to be treated or prevented by administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I include solid tumor, sarcoma, carcinomas, fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, colon carcinoma, pancreatic cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal
  • the invention encompasses a method of treating or preventing a disease ameliorated by modulation of premature translation termination and or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay, or ameliorating one or more symptoms associated therewith comprising contacting a cell with an effective amount of a compound of formula I, II, III, IV or V.
  • Cells encompassed by the present methods include animal cells, mammalian cells, bacterial cells, plant cells and virally infected cells.
  • the nonsense codon was present in the progenitor DNA.
  • the nonsense codon resulted from mutagenesis.
  • a compound of formula I, II, III, IV or V, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is administered to a patient, preferably a mammal, more preferably a human, as a preventative measure against a disease associated with premature translation termination and or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay.
  • the patient is suffering from a disease associate with premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay.
  • the patient has undergone a screening process to determine the presence of a nonsense mutation comprising the steps of screening a subject, or cells extracted therefrom, by an acceptable nonsense mutation screening assay.
  • the DNA of the patient can be sequenced or subject to Southern Blot, polymerase chain reaction (PCR), use of the Short Tandem Repeat (STR), or polymo ⁇ hic length restriction fragments (RFLP) analysis to determine if a nonsense mutation is present in the DNA of the patient.
  • the patient is an unborn child who has undergone screening in utero for the presence of a nonsense mutation.
  • Administration of a compound of formula I, II, III, IV or V can occur either before or after birth.
  • the therapy is personalized in that the patient is screened for a nonsense mutation screening assay and treated by the administration of one or more compounds of the invention; particularly, the patient may be treated with a compoxmd particularly suited for the mutations in question; e.g., depending upon the disease type, cell type, and the gene in question.
  • a compoxmd particularly suited for the mutations in question; e.g., depending upon the disease type, cell type, and the gene in question.
  • the cells e.g., animal cells, mammalian cells, bacterial cells, plant cells and virally infected cells
  • a method such as that described above (i.e., the DNA of the cell can be sequenced or subjected to Southern Blot, polymerase chain reaction (PCR), use of the Short Tandem Repeat (STR), or polymo ⁇ hic length restriction fragments (RFLP) analysis to determine if a nonsense mutation is present in the DNA of the cell).
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • STR Short Tandem Repeat
  • RFLP polymo ⁇ hic length restriction fragments
  • Specific methods of the invention further comprise the administration of an additional therapeutic agent (i.e. a therapeutic agent other than a compound of the invention).
  • an additional therapeutic agent i.e. a therapeutic agent other than a compound of the invention.
  • the compounds of the invention can be used in combination with at least one other therapeutic agent.
  • Therapeutic agents include, but are not limited to non-opioid analgesics; non-steroid anti-inflammatory agents; antiemetics; ⁇ -adrenergic blockers; anticonvulsants; antidepressants; Ca 2+ -channel blockers; anticancer agent and mixtures thereof.
  • the compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V can be administered or formulated in combination with anticancer agents.
  • Suitable anticancer agents include, but are not limited to, alkylating agents; nitrogen mustards; folate antagonists; purine antagonists; pyrimidine antagonists; spindle poisons; topoisomerase inhibitors; apoptosis inducing agents; angiogenesis inhibitors; podophyllotoxins; nitrosoureas; cisplatin; carboplatin; interferon; asparginase; tamoxifen; leuprolide; flutamide; megestrol; mitomycin; bleomycin; doxorubicin; irinotecan and taxol.
  • the compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V can be administered or formulated in combination with antibiotics
  • the antibiotic is a macrolide (e.g., tobramycin (Tobi®)), a cephalosporin (e.g., cephalexin (Keflex®), cephradine (Nelosef®), cefixroxime (Ceftin®), cefprozil (Cefzil®), cefaclor (Ceclor®), cefixime (Suprax®) or cefadroxil (Duricef®)), a clarithromycin (e.g., clarithromycin (Biaxin®)), an erythromycin (e.g., erythromycin (EMycin®)), a penicillin (e.g., penicillin N (N-Cillin K® or Pen Nee K®)) or a quinolone (e.g., ofloxacin (Floxin®), ciprof
  • the antibiotic is active against Pseudomonas aeruginosa.
  • the compounds of the invention and the other therapeutics agent can act additively or, more preferably, synergistically.
  • a composition comprising a compound of the invention is administered concurrently with the adminisfration of another therapeutic agent, which can be part of the same composition or in a different composition from that comprising the compounds of the invention.
  • a compound of the invention is administered prior to or subsequent to administration of another therapeutic agent.
  • a prophylactic or therapeutic dose of a particular active ingredient of the invention in the acute or chronic management of a disease or condition will vary, however, with the nature and severity of the disease or condition, and the route by which the active ingredient is administered.
  • the dose, and perhaps the dose frequency will also vary according to the age, body weight, and response of the individual patient. Suitable dosing regimens can be readily selected by those skilled in the art with due consideration of such factors.
  • the recommended daily dose range for the conditions described herein lie within the range of from about 0.1 mg to about 2000 mg per day, given as a single once- a-day dose, preferably as divided doses throughout a day.
  • the daily dose is administered in a single dose or in equally divided doses.
  • a daily dose range should be from about 5 mg to about 500 mg per day, more specifically, between about 10 mg and about 200 mg per day.
  • the therapy should be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps about 1 mg to about 25 mg, and increased if necessary up to about ⁇ _ _ ⁇ ⁇
  • therapeutically effective amount encompasses the above described dosage amounts and dose frequency schedules. Different therapeutically effective amounts may be applicable for different diseases and conditions, as will be readily known by those of ordinary skill in the art. Similarly, amounts sufficient to treat or prevent such diseases, but insufficient to cause, or sufficient to reduce, adverse effects associated with conventional therapies are also encompassed by the above described dosage amounts and dose frequency schedules. 4.5 PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
  • compositions and single unit dosage forms comprising a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable polymo ⁇ h, prodrug, salt, solvate, hydrate, or clathrate thereof, are also encompassed by the invention.
  • Individual dosage forms of the invention may be suitable for oral, mucosal (including sublingual, buccal, rectal, nasal, or vaginal), parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, bolus injection, mfraarterial, or intravenous), transdermal, or topical administration.
  • compositions and dosage forms of the invention comprise a compoxmd of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug, polymo ⁇ h, salt, solvate, hydrate, or clathrate thereof.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention typically also comprise one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients.
  • a particular pharmaceutical composition encompassed by this embodiment comprises a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable polymo ⁇ h, prodrug, salt, solvate, hydrate, or clathrate thereof, and at least one additional therapeutic agent.
  • additional therapeutic agents include, but are not limited to: anti-cancer drugs and anti-inflammation therapies including, but not limited to, those listed above in Section 4.3.
  • Single unit dosage forms of the invention are suitable for oral, mucosal (e.g., nasal, sublingual, vaginal, buccal, or rectal), parenteral (e.g., subcutaneous, intravenous, bolus injection, intramuscular, or intraarterial), or transdermal adminisfration to a patient. ,...,, undertaken. ,, , context consider herein. ..,, ... modix.
  • parenteral e.g., subcutaneous, intravenous, bolus injection, intramuscular, or intraarterial
  • transdermal adminisfration e.g., transdermal adminisfration to a patient.
  • mucosal e.g., nasal, sublingual, vaginal, buccal, or rectal
  • parenteral e.g., subcutaneous, intravenous, bolus injection, intramuscular, or intraarterial
  • transdermal adminisfration e.g., transdermal adminisfration
  • dosage forms include, but are not limited to: tablets; caplets; capsules, such as soft elastic gelatin capsules; cachets; troches; lozenges; dispersions; suppositories; ointments; cataplasms (poultices); pastes; powders; dressings; creams; plasters; solutions; patches; aerosols (e.g., nasal sprays or inhalers); gels; liquid dosage forms suitable for oral or mucosal adminisfration to a patient, including suspensions (e.g., aqueous or non-aqueous liquid suspensions, oil-in- water emulsions, or a water-in-oil liquid emulsions), solutions, and elixirs; liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral administration to a patient; and sterile solids (e.g., crystalline or amo ⁇ hous solids) that can be reconstituted to provide liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral administration to a patient.
  • suspensions e.g.,
  • composition, shape, and type of dosage forms of the invention will typically vary depending on their use.
  • a dosage form used in the acute treatment of inflammation or a related disease may contain larger amounts of one or more of the active ingredients it comprises than a dosage form used in the chronic treatment of the same disease.
  • a parenteral dosage form may contain smaller amounts of one or more of the active ingredients it comprises than an oral dosage form used to treat the same disease or disorder.
  • Typical pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprise one or more carriers, excipients or diluents.
  • Suitable excipients are well known to those skilled in the art of pharmacy, and non-limiting examples of suitable excipients are provided herein. Whether a particular excipient is suitable for inco ⁇ oration into a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form depends on a variety of factors well known in the art including, but not limited to, the way in which the dosage form will be administered to a patient.
  • oral dosage forms such as tablets may contain excipients not suited for use in parenteral dosage forms. The suitability of a particular excipient may also depend on the specific active ingredients in the dosage form.
  • This invention further encompasses anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprising active ingredients, since water can facilitate the degradation of some compounds.
  • water e.g., 5%
  • water is widely accepted in the pharmaceutical arts as a means of simulating long-term storage in order to determine characteristics such as shelf-life or the stability of formulations over time. See, e.g., Jens T. Carstensen, Drug Stability: Principles & Practice, 2d. Ed., Marcel Dekker, NY, NY, 1995, pp. 379-80.
  • water and heat accelerate the decomposition of some compounds.
  • the effect of water on a formulation can be of great significance since moisture and/or humidity are commonly encountered during manufacture, handling, packaging, storage, shipment, and use of formulations.
  • Anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention can be prepared using anhydrous or low moisture containing ingredients and low moisture or low humidity conditions.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that comprise lactose and at least one active ingredient that comprises a primary or secondary amine are preferably anhydrous if substantial contact with moisture and/or humidity during manufacturing, packaging, and/or storage is expected.
  • An anhydrous pharmaceutical composition should be prepared and stored such that its anhydrous nature is maintained.
  • anhydrous compositions are preferably packaged using materials known to prevent exposure to water such that they can be included in suitable formulary kits. Examples of suitable packaging include, but are not limited to, hermetically sealed foils, plastics, unit dose containers (e.g., vials), blister packs, and strip packs.
  • compositions and dosage forms that comprise one or more compounds that reduce the rate by which an active ingredient will decompose.
  • compounds which are referred to herein as “stabilizers,” include, but are not limited to, antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, pH buffers, or salt buffers.
  • antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, pH buffers, or salt buffers.
  • the amounts and specific types of active ingredients in a dosage form may differ depending on factors such as, but not limited to, the route by which it is to be administered to patients.
  • typical dosage forms of the invention comprise a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, hydrate, polymoprh or prodrug thereof lie within the range of from about 0.1 mg to about 2000 mg per day, given as a single once-a-day dose in the morning but preferably as divided doses throughout the day taken with food. More specifically, the daily dose is administered twice daily in equally divided doses. Specifically, a daily dose range should be from about 5 mg to about 500 mg per day, more specifically, between about 10 mg and about 200 mg per day.
  • the therapy should be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps about 1 mg to about 25 mg, and increased if necessary up to about 200 mg to about 2000 mg per day as either a single dose or divided doses, depending on the patient's global response.
  • compositions of the invention that are suitable for oral admimstration can be presented as discrete dosage forms, such as, but are not limited to, tablets (e.g., chewable tablets), caplets, capsules, and liquids (e.g., flavored syrups).
  • dosage forms contain predetermined amounts of active ingredients, and may be prepared by methods of pharmacy well known to those skilled in the art. See generally, Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990).
  • Typical oral dosage forms of the invention are prepared by combining the active ingredient(s) in an intimate admixture with at least one excipient according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques.
  • Excipients can take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for admimstration.
  • excipients suitable for use in oral liquid or aerosol dosage forms include, but are not limited to, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, and coloring agents.
  • excipients suitable for use in solid oral dosage forms include, but are not limited to, starches, sugars, micro-crystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, and disintegrating agents.
  • tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit forms, in which case solid excipients are employed. If desired, tablets can be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques. Such dosage forms can be prepared by any of the methods of pharmacy. In general, pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms are prepared by uniformly and intimately admixing the active ingredients with liquid carriers, finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then shaping the product into the desired presentation if necessary.
  • a tablet can be prepared by compression or molding.
  • Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredients in a free-flowing form such as powder or granules, optionally mixed with an excipient.
  • Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
  • excipients that can be used in oral dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, binders, fillers, disintegrants, and lubricants.
  • Binders suitable for use in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms include, but are not limited to, corn starch, potato starch, or other starches, gelatin, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, sodium alginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacanth, guar gum, cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl u _ _ .. dots .
  • fillers suitable for use in the pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, talc, calcium carbonate (e.g., granules or powder), microcrystalline cellulose, powdered cellulose, dextrates, kaolin, mannitol, silicic acid, sorbitol, starch, pre-gelatinized starch, and mixtures thereof.
  • the binder or filler in pharmaceutical compositions of the invention is typically present in from about 50 to about 99 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form.
  • Suitable forms of microcrystalline cellulose include, but are not limited to, the materials sold as AVICEL-PH-101, AVICEL-PH-103 AVICEL RC-581, AVICEL-PH-105 (available from FMC Co ⁇ oration, American Viscose Division, Avicel Sales, Marcus Hook, PA), and mixtures thereof.
  • An specific binder is a mixture of microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose sold as AVICEL RC-581.
  • Suitable anhydrous or low moisture excipients or additives include AVICEL-PH-103TM and Starch 1500 LM.
  • Disintegrants are used in the compositions of the invention to provide tablets that disintegrate when exposed to an aqueous environment. Tablets that contain too much disintegrant may disintegrate in storage, while those that contain too little may not disintegrate at a desired rate or under the desired conditions. Thus, a sufficient amount of disintegrant that is neither too much nor too little to detrimentally alter the release of the active ingredients should be used to form solid oral dosage forms of the invention.
  • the amount of disintegrant used varies based upon the type of formulation, and is readily discernible to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Typical pharmaceutical compositions comprise from about 0.5 to about 15 weight percent of disintegrant, specifically from about 1 to about 5 weight percent of disintegrant.
  • Disintegrants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, agar-agar, alginic acid, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, polacrilin potassium, sodium starch glycolate, potato or tapioca starch, pre-gelatinized starch, other starches, clays, other algins, other celluloses, gums, and mixtures thereof.
  • Lubricants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc, hydrogenated vegetable oil (e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil, and soybean oil), zinc stearate, ethyl oleate, ethyl laureate, agar, and mixtures thereof.
  • calcium stearate e.g., magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc
  • hydrogenated vegetable oil e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil
  • Additional lubricants include, for example, a syloid silica gel (AEROSIL 200, manufactured by W.R. Grace Co. of Baltimore, MD), a coagulated aerosol of synthetic silica (marketed by Degussa Co. of Piano, TX), CAB-O-SIL (a pyrogenic silicon dioxide product sold by Cabot Co. of Boston, MA), and mixtures thereof. If used at all, lubricants are typically used in an amount of less than about 1 weight percent of the pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms into which they are inco ⁇ orated.
  • AEROSIL 200 a syloid silica gel
  • a coagulated aerosol of synthetic silica marketed by Degussa Co. of Piano, TX
  • CAB-O-SIL a pyrogenic silicon dioxide product sold by Cabot Co. of Boston, MA
  • lubricants are typically used in an amount of less than about 1 weight percent of the pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms into which they are inco ⁇ orated.
  • Active ingredients of the invention can be administered by controlled release means or by delivery devices that are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Patent Nos.: 3,845,770; 3,916,899; 3,536,809; 3,598,123; and 4,008,719, 5,674,533, 5,059,595, 5,591,767, 5,120,548, 5,073,543, 5,639,476, 5,354,556, and 5,733,566, each of which is inco ⁇ orated herein by reference.
  • Such dosage forms can be used to provide slow or controlled-release of one or more active ingredients using, for example, hydropropylmethyl cellulose, other polymer matrices, gels, permeable membranes, osmotic systems, multilayer coatings, microparticles, liposomes, microspheres, or a combination thereof to provide the desired release profile in varying proportions.
  • Suitable controlled-release formulations known to those of ordinary skill in the art, including those described herein, can be readily selected for use with the active ingredients of the invention.
  • the invention thus encompasses single unit dosage forms suitable for oral administration such as, but not limited to, tablets, capsules, gelcaps, and caplets that are adapted for controlled-release.
  • controlled-release pharmaceutical products have a common goal of improving drug therapy over that achieved by their non-controlled counte ⁇ arts.
  • the use of an optimally designed controlled-release preparation in medical treatment is characterized by a minimum of drug substance being employed to cure or control the condition in a minimum amount of time.
  • Advantages of confrolled-release formulations include extended activity of the drug, reduced dosage frequency, and increased patient compliance.
  • controlled-release formulations can be used to affect the time of onset of action or other characteristics, such as blood levels of the drug, and can thus affect the occurrence of side (e.g., adverse) effects.
  • Controlled-release formulations are designed to initially release an amount of drug (active ingredient) that promptly produces the desired therapeutic effect, and gradually . _ and continually release of other amounts of drug to maintain this level of therapeutic or prophylactic effect over an extended period of time. In order to maintain this constant level of drug in the body, the drug must be released from the dosage form at a rate that will replace the amount of drug being metabolized and excreted from the body. Controlled- release of an active ingredient can be stimulated by various conditions including, but not limited to, pH, temperature, enzymes, water, or other physiological conditions or compounds.
  • Parenteral dosage forms can be administered to patients by various routes including, but not limited to, subcutaneous, intravenous (including bolus injection), intramuscular, and intraarterial. Because their administration typically bypasses patients' natural defenses against contaminants, parenteral dosage forms are preferably sterile or capable of being sterilized prior to administration to a patient. Examples of parenteral dosage forms include, but are not limited to, solutions ready for injection, dry products ready to be dissolved or suspended in a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle for injection, suspensions ready for injection, and emulsions.
  • Suitable vehicles that can be used to provide parenteral dosage forms of the invention are well known to those skilled in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to: Water for Injection USP; aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Injection, Dextrose Injection, Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection, and Lactated Ringer's Injection; water-miscible vehicles such as, but not limited to, ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol; and non-aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, corn oil, cottonseed oil, peanut oil, sesame oil, ethyl oleate, isopropyl myristate, and benzyl benzoate. Compounds that increase the solubility of one or more of the active ingredients disclosed herein can also be inco ⁇ orated into the parenteral dosage forms of the invention.
  • Transdermal and topical dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, creams, lotions, ointments, gels, solutions, emulsions, suspensions, or other forms known to one of skill in the art. See, e.g., Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds.,
  • Transdermal dosage forms include "reservoir type” or “matrix type” patches, which can be applied to the skin and worn for a specific period of time to permit the penetration of a desired amount of active ingredients.
  • Suitable excipients e.g., carriers and diluents
  • other materials that can be used to provide transdermal and topical dosage forms encompassed by this invention are well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts, and depend on the particular tissue to which a given pharmaceutical composition or dosage form will be applied.
  • typical excipients include, but are not limited to, water, acetone, ethanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butane- 1,3-diol, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, mineral oil, and mixtures thereof to form lotions, tinctures, creams, emulsions, gels or ointments, which are non-toxic and pharmaceutically acceptable.
  • Moisturizers or humectants can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms if desired. Examples of such additional ingredients are well known in the art. See, e.g., Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990).
  • penetration enhancers can be used to assist in delivering the active ingredients to the tissue.
  • Suitable penetration enhancers include, but are not limited to: acetone; various alcohols such as ethanol, oleyl, and tetrahydrofuryl; alkyl sulfoxides such as dimethyl sulfoxide; dimethyl acetamide; dimethyl formamide; polyethylene glycol; pyrrolidones such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; Kollidon grades (Povidone, Polyvidone); urea; and various water-soluble or insoluble sugar esters such as Tween 80 (polysorbate 80) and Span 60 (sorbitan monostearate).
  • the pH of a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form, or of the tissue to which the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form is applied may also be adjusted to improve delivery of one or more active ingredients.
  • the polarity of a solvent carrier, its ionic strength, or tonicity can be adjusted to improve delivery.
  • Compounds such as stearates can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms to advantageously alter the hydrophilicity or lipophilicity of one or more active ingredients so as to improve delivery.
  • stearates can serve as a lipid vehicle for the formulation, as an emulsifying agent or surfactant, and as a delivery-enhancing or penetration-enhancing agent.
  • Different salts, hydrates or solvates of the active ingredients can be used to further adjust the properties of the resulting composition.
  • Mucosal dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, ophthalmic solutions, sprays and aerosols, or other forms known to one of skill in the art. See, e.g., Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990); and Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, 4th ed., Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia (1985). Dosage forms suitable for treating mucosal tissues within the oral cavity can be formulated as mouthwashes or as oral gels.
  • the aerosol comprises a carrier. In another embodiment, the aerosol is carrier free.
  • a compound of formula V can also be administered directly to the lung by inhalation (see e.g., Tong et al., PCT Application, WO 97/39745; Clark et al, PCT Application, WO 99/47196, which are herein inco ⁇ orated by reference).
  • inhalation a compound of formula V can be conveniently delivered to the lung by a number of different devices.
  • a Metered Dose Inhaler which utilizes canisters that contain a suitable low boiling propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichloroftuoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas can be used to deliver a compound of formula I directly to the lung.
  • MDI devices are available from a number of suppliers such as 3M Co ⁇ oration, Aventis, Boehringer Ingleheim, Forest Laboratories, Glaxo-Wellcome, Schering Plough and Nectura.
  • a Dry Powder Inhaler (DPI) device can be used to administer a compound of formula I to the lung (See, e.g., Raleigh et al., Proc. Amer. Assoc. Cancer Research Annual Meeting, 1999, 40, 397, which is herein inco ⁇ orated by reference).
  • DPI devices typically use a mechanism such as a burst of gas to create a cloud of dry powder inside a container, which can then be inhaled by the patient.
  • DPI devices are also well known in the art and can be purchased from a number of vendors which include, for example, Fisons, Glaxo-Wellcome, Inhale Therapeutic Systems, ML Laboratories, Qdose and Nectura.
  • MDDPI multiple dose DPI
  • a popular variation is the multiple dose DPI (“MDDPI”) system, which allows for the delivery of more than one therapeutic dose.
  • MDDPI devices are available from companies such as AstraZeneca, Glaxo Wellcome, IN AX, Schering Plough, SkyePharma and Nectura.
  • capsules and cartridges of gelatin for use in an inhaler or insufflator can be formulated containing a powder mix of the compound and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch for these systems.
  • liquid spray device Another type of device that can be used to deliver a compound of formula V to the lung is a liquid spray device supplied, for example, by Aradigm Co ⁇ oration.
  • Liquid spray systems use extremely small nozzle holes to aerosolize liquid drug formulations that can then be directly inhaled into the lung.
  • a nebulizer device is used to deliver a compound of formula V to the lung.
  • Nebulizers create aerosols from liquid drug formulations by using, for example, ultrasonic energy to form fine particles that can be readily inhaled (See e.g., ⁇ > ⁇ ⁇ _ _ ⁇ _
  • nebulizers include devices supplied by Sheffield/Systemic Pulmonary Delivery Ltd. (See, Armer et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,954,047; van der Linden et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,950,619; van der Linden et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,970,974, which are herein inco ⁇ orated by reference), Aventis and Batelle Pulmonary Therapeutics.
  • EHD aerosol device uses electrical energy to aerosolize liquid drug solutions or suspensions (see e.g., Noakes et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,765,539; Coffee, U.S.
  • the electrochemical properties of the compound of formula I formulation may be important parameters to optimize when delivering this drug to the lung with an EHD aerosol device and such optimization is routinely performed by one of skill in the art.
  • EHD aerosol devices may more efficiently delivery drugs to the lung than existing pulmonary delivery technologies.
  • Other methods of infra-pulmonary delivery of a compound of formula V will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention.
  • Liquid drug formulations suitable for use with nebulizers and liquid spray devices and EHD aerosol devices will typically include a compound of formula I with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is a liquid such as alcohol, water, polyethylene glycol or a perfluorocarbon.
  • another material maybe added to alter the aerosol properties of the solution or suspension of a compound of formula V.
  • this material is liquid such as an alcohol, glycol, polyglycol or a fatty acid.
  • Other methods of formulating liquid drug solutions or suspension suitable for use in aerosol devices are known to those of skill in the art (See, e.g., Biesalski, U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • a compound of formula I can also be formulated in rectal or vaginal compositions such as suppositories or retention enemas, e.g., containing conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides.
  • ___ ⁇ ⁇ r ⁇ ⁇ _ ____ _ h addition to the formulations described previously, a compound of formula V can also be formulated as a depot preparation.
  • Such long acting fonnulations can be administered by implantation (for example subcutaneously or intramuscularly) or by intramuscular injection.
  • the compounds can be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example, as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt.
  • Liposomes and emulsions are well known examples of delivery vehicles that can be used to deliver a compound of formula V.
  • Certain organic solvents such as dimethylsulfoxide can also be employed, although usually at the cost of greater toxicity.
  • a compound of formula I can also be delivered in a controlled release system.
  • a pump can be used (Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref Biomed Eng., 1987, 14, 201; Buchwald et al., Surgery, 1980, 88, 507; Saudek et al., N. Engl. J Med, 1989, 321, 574).
  • polymeric materials can be used (see Medical Applications of Controlled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Fla. (1974); Controlled Drug Bioavailability, Drug Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, J Macromol. Sci. Rev. Macromol. Chem., 1983, 23, 61; see also Levy et al., Science 1985, 228, 190; During et al., Ann. Neural., 1989,25,351; Howard et al, 1989, J. Neurosurg. 71, 105).
  • a confrolled-release system can be placed in proximity of the target of the compounds of the invention, e.g., the lung, thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115 (1984)).
  • Other confrolled-release system can be used (see e.g. Langer, Science, 1990, 249, 1527).
  • Suitable excipients (e.g., carriers and diluents) and other materials that can be used to provide mucosal dosage forms encompassed by this invention are well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts, and depend on the particular site or method which a given pharmaceutical composition or dosage form will be administered.
  • excipients include, but are not limited to, water, ethanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butane- 1,3 -diol, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, mineral oil, and mixtures thereof, which are non-toxic and pharmaceutically acceptable.
  • additional ingredients are well known in the art. See, e.g., Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990).
  • the pH of a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form, or of the tissue to which the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form is applied can also be adjusted to improve delivery of one or more active ingredients.
  • the polarity of a solvent carrier, its ionic strength, or tonicity can be adjusted to improve delivery.
  • Compounds such as stearates can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions or dosage fonns to advantageously alter the hydrophilicity or lipophilicity of one or more active ingredients so as to improve delivery.
  • stearates can serve as a lipid vehicle for the fonnulation, as an emulsifying agent or surfactant, and as a delivery-enhancing or penetration-enhancing agent.
  • Different salts, hydrates or solvates of the active ingredients can be used to further adjust the properties of the resulting composition.
  • the mixture was allowed to stir for 1 h, then was treated with methyl iodide (0.60 g), and the resulting mixture stirred overnight. It was diluted with ethyl acetate (50 mL), and this was washed with three 50 mL portions of water and then brine. The aqueous phases were back-extracted in sequence with ethyl acetate, and the organic extracts were combined, dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated.
  • Ribosomes prepared from HeLa cells were incubated with the small molecules (at a concentration of 100 ⁇ M), followed by treatment with chemical modifying agents (dimethyl sulfate [DMS] and kethoxal [KE]).
  • DMS dimethyl sulfate
  • KE kethoxal
  • rR ⁇ A was phenol- chlorofonn extracted, ethanol precipitated, analyzed in primer extension reactions using end-labeled oligonucleotides hybridizing to different regions of the three rR ⁇ As and resolved on 6% polyacrylamide gels.
  • the probes used for primer extension cover the entire 18S (7 oligonucleotide primers), 28S (24 oligonucleotide primers), and 5S (one primer) rR ⁇ As.
  • Controls in these experiments include DMSO (a control for changes in rR ⁇ A accessibility induced by DMSO), paromomycin (a marker for 18S rR ⁇ A binding), and anisomycin (a marker for 28S rR ⁇ A binding).
  • a bronchial epithelial cell line harboring a nonsense codon at amino acid 1282 (W1282X) was treated with 3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)- acetylamino] -benzoic acid, sodium salt (20 ⁇ M) and CFTR function was monitored as a cAMP-activated chloride channel using the SPQ assay (Yang et al., 1993, Hum Mol Genet. 2(8):1253-1261 and Howard et al., 1996, Nat Med. 2(4):467-469).
  • mice The mutation in the mdx mouse that premature termination of the 427 kDa dystrophin polypeptide has been shown to be a C to T transition at position 3185 in exon 23 (Sicinski et al., 1989, Science. 244(4912):1578-1580).
  • Mouse primary skeletal muscle cultures derived from 1-day old mdx mice were prepared as described previously (Barton- Davis et al., 1999, J Clin Invest. 104(4):375-381). Cells were cultured for 10 days in the presence of 3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid, sodium salt (20 ⁇ M).
  • mice were freated for 14 days, after which animals were anesthetized with ketamine and exsanguinated.
  • the tibialis anterior (TA) muscle of the experimental animals was then excised, frozen, and used for immunofluorescence analysis of dystrophin inco ⁇ oration into striated muscle.
  • the presence of dystrophin in TA muscles was detected by immunostaining, as described previously (Barton-Davis et al., 1999, J Clin Invest. 104(4):375-381).
  • Table 3 illustrates a batch formulation and single dosage formulation for a 200 mg 3-[2-(3'-methyl-biphen-4-yloxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid single dose unit, i.e., about 40 percent by weight.
  • the pregelatinized corn starch (SPRESS B-820) and 3-[2-(3'-methyl-biphen-4- yloxy)-acetylamino] -benzoic acid components are passed through a 710 ⁇ m screen and then are loaded into a Diffusion Mixer with a baffle insert and blended for 15 minutes.
  • the magnesium stearate is passed through a 210 ⁇ m screen and is added to the Diffusion Mixer.
  • the blend is then encapsulated in a size #0 capsule, 500 mg per capsule (8400 capsule batch size) using a Dosator type capsule filling machine.
  • Table 4 illustrates a batch formulation and a single dose unit formulation containing 100 mg of 3-[2-(4-cyclopentyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid.
  • microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, and 3-[2-(4-cyclopentyl- phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid components are passed through a #30 mesh screen (about 430 ⁇ to about 655 ⁇ ).
  • the Pluronic F-68® (manufactured by JRH Biosciences, Inc. of Lenexa, KS) surfactant is passed through a #20 mesh screen (about 457 ⁇ to about 1041 ⁇ ).
  • the Pluronic F-68® surfactant and 0.5 kgs of croscarmellose sodium are loaded into a 16 qt. twin shell tumble blender and are mixed for about 5 minutes.
  • the mix is then transfened to a 3 cubic foot twin shell tumble blender where the microcrystalline cellulose is added and blended for about 5 minutes.
  • the thalidomide is added and blended for an additional 25 minutes.
  • This pre-blend is passed through a roller compactor with a hammer mill attached at the discharge of the roller compactor and moved back to the tumble blender.
  • croscarmellose sodium and magnesium stearate is added to the tumble blender and blended for about 3 minutes.
  • the final mixture is compressed on a rotary tablet press with 250 mg per tablet (200,000 tablet batch size). ⁇ ._ _ _
  • a concentrate is prepared by combining 3-[2-(4-trifluoromethoxy-phenoxy)- acetylaminoj-benzoic acid, and a 12.6 kg portion of the trichloromonofluoromethane in a sealed stainless steel vessel equipped with a high shear mixer. Mixing is carried out for about 20 minutes.
  • the bulk suspension is then prepared in the sealed vessel by combining the concentrate with the balance of the propellants in a bulk product tank that is temperature controlled to 21° to 27 °C. and pressure controlled to 2.8 to 4.0 BAR. 17 ml aerosol containers which have a metered valve which is designed to provide 100 inhalations of the composition of the invention. Each container is provided with the following:

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

Novel acetylamino benzoic acid compounds, methods of using and pharmaceutical compositions comprising an acetylamino benzoic acid derivative are disclosed. The methods include methods of treating or preventing a disease ameliorated by modulation of premature translation termination or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay, or ameliorating one or more symptoms associated therewith.

Description

ACETYLAMINO BENZOIC ACID COMPOUNDS AND THEIR USE FOR NONSENSE SUPPRESSION AND THE TREATMENT OF DISEASE
1. FIELD OF INVENTION
The invention relates to acetylamino benzoic acid compounds, compositions comprising the compounds and methods for treating or preventing diseases associated with nonsense mutations of mRNA by administering these compounds or compositions.
2. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Gene expression in cells depends upon the sequential processes of transcription and translation. Together, these processes produce a protein from the nucleotide sequence of its corresponding gene.
Transcription involves the synthesis of mRNA from DNA by RNA polymerase. Transcription begins at a promoter region of the gene and continues until termination is induced, such as by the formation of a stem-loop structure in the nascent RNA or the binding of the rho gene product.
Protein is then produced from mRNA by the process of translation, occurring on the ribosome with the aid of tRNA, tRNA synthetases and various other protein and RNA species. Translation comprises the three phases of initiation, elongation and termination. Translation is initiated by the formation of an initiation complex consisting of protein factors, mRNA, tRNA, cofactors and the ribosomal subunits that recognize signals on the mRNA that direct the translation machinery to begin translation on the mRNA. Once the initiation complex is formed, growth of the polypeptide chain occurs by the repetitive addition of amino acids by the peptidyl transferase activity of the ribosome as well as tRNA and tRNA synthetases. The presence of one of the three termination codons (UAA, UAG, UGA) in the A site of the ribosome signals the polypeptide chain release factors (RFs) to bind and recognize the termination signal. Subsequently, the ester bond between the 3' nucleotide of the tRNA located in the ribosome' s P site and the nascent polypeptide chain is hydrolyzed, the completed polypeptide chain is released, and the ribosome subunits are recycled for another round of translation.
Mutations of the DNA sequence in which the number of bases is altered are categorized as insertion or deletion mutations (frameshift mutations) and can result in major disruptions of the genome. Mutations of the DNA that change one base into another are labeled missense mutations and are subdivided into the classes of transitions (one purine to another purine, or one pyrimidine to another pyrimidine) and transversions (a purine to a pyrimidine, or a pyrimidine to a purine).
Insertions, deletions, transition and transversion mutations can all result in a nonsense mutation, or chain termination mutation, in which the base mutation or frameshift mutation changes an amino acid codon into one of the three stop codons. These premature stop codons can produce aberrant proteins in cells as a result of premature translation termination. A nonsense mutation in an essential gene can be lethal and can also result in a number of diseases, such as, cancers, lysosomal storage disorders, the muscular dystrophies, cystic fibrosis and hemophilia, to name a few. In bacterial and eukaryotic strains with nonsense mutations, suppression of the nonsense mutation can arise as a result of a mutation in one of the tRNA molecules so that the mutant tRNA can recognize the nonsense codon, as a result of mutations in proteins that are involved in the translation process, as a result of mutations in the ribosome (either the ribosomal RNA or ribosomal proteins), or by the addition of compounds known to alter the translation process (for example, cycloheximide or the aminoglycoside antibiotics) .
The result is that an amino acid will be incorporated into the polypeptide chain at the site of the nonsense mutation, and translation will not prematurely terminate at the nonsense codon. The inserted amino acid will not necessarily be identical to the original amino acid of the wild-type protein; however, many amino acid substitutions do not have a gross effect on protein structure or function. Thus, a protein produced by the suppression of a nonsense mutation would be likely to possess activity close to that of the wild-type protein. This scenario provides an opportunity to treat diseases associated with nonsense mutations by avoiding premature termination of translation through suppression of the nonsense mutation. The ability of aminoglycoside antibiotics to promote readthrough of eukaryotic stop codons has attracted interest in these drugs as potential therapeutic agents in human diseases caused by nonsense mutations. One disease for which such a therapeutic strategy may be viable is classical late infantile neuronal ceroid lipofuscinosis (LINCL), a fatal childhood neurodegenerative disease with currently no effective treatment. Premature stop codon mutations in the gene CLN2, encoding the lysosomal tripeptidyl-peptidase 1 (TPP-I), are associated with disease in approximately half of children diagnosed with LLNCL. The ability of the aminoglycoside gentamicin to restore TPP-I activity in LINCL cell lines has been examined. In one patient-derived cell line that was compound heterozygous for a commonly seen nonsense mutation (Arg208Stop) and a different rare nonsense mutation, approximately 7% of normal levels of TPP-I were maximally restored with gentamicin treatment. These results suggest that pharmacological suppression of nonsense mutations by aminoglycosides or functionally similar pharmaceuticals may have therapeutic potential in LINCL (Sleat et. al, Eur. J. Ped. Neurol 5:Suppl A 57-62 (2001)). In cultured cells having premature stop codons in the Cystic Fibrosis
Transmembrane Conductance Regulator (CFTR) gene, treatment with aminoglycosides led to the production of full length CFTR (Bedwell et. al, Nat. Med. 3:1280-1284 (1997); Howard et. al. Nat. Med. 2: 467-469 (1996)). In a mouse model for Duchenne muscular dystrophy, gentamicin sulfate was observed to suppress translational termination at a premature stop codon resulting in full length dystrophin (Barton-Davis et. al, J. Clin. Invest. 104:375-381 (1999)). A small increase in the amount of full length dystrophin provided protection against contraction-induced damage in the mdx mice. The amino acid inserted at the site of the nonsense codon was not determined in these studies.
Small molecule therapeutics or prophylactics that suppress premature translation termination by mediating the misreading of the nonsense codon would be useful for the treatment of a number of diseases. The discovery of small molecule drugs, particularly orally bioavailable drugs, may lead to the introduction of a broad spectrum of selective therapeutics which can be used against disease caused by nonsense mutations
3- SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The invention encompasses novel compounds, novel pharmaceutical compositions and novel methods of treatment. The compounds, compositions, and methods are, in part, based upon the modulation of premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay which play a role in a variety of diseases. Such diseases can occur due to the decreased amount of active protein produced as a result of premature termination of translation. The compounds of the invention allow the translation of mRNA to continue past the nonsense mutation resulting in the production of full length protein. Thus the invention encompasses compounds, compositions, and methods for treating and preventing a variety of diseases, in particular genetic diseases.
This invention encompasses acetylamino benzoic acid compounds of formula I:
Figure imgf000004_0001
I or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymorphs, stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers, thereof wherein: X is oxygen, sulfur, CO, SO or S(O)2;
Y is oxygen or sulfur;
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl; n is an integer from 0 to 4; R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R7, CF3, CN, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R is hydrogen, or taken together with R and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring;
R2, R3, R4 and R5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or N(R7)2;
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3; with the proviso that when X is O, Y is O, n is 0 and R1 is hydrogen, then Z is not 4- chlorophenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, or 2,4-dichlorophenyl; and with the proviso that when X is O, Y is O, n is 0, R1 is hydrogen, and Z is unsubstituted phenyl at least one of R2-R5 is not hydrogen; and with the proviso that when R3 is COOH, R2, R4, and R5 are not all halogen. hi a related embodiment, the invention encompasses acetylamino benzoic acid compounds of the formula II:
Figure imgf000006_0001
II or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, or stereoisomers thereof wherein: Z, X, R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, and R6 are defined as in formula I. h a further embodiment, the invention encompasses acetylamino benzoic acid compounds of the formula III:
Figure imgf000006_0002
III or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymorphs, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers thereof wherein Z, R1 and R are as defined in formula I and R is defined as R in formula I. The compounds including preferred compounds and salts, as well as methods of synthesis are described in more detail below.
In a further embodiment, the invention encompasses acetylamino benzoic acid compounds of the formula IV:
Figure imgf000006_0003
IV or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymorphs, enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers thereof wherein Z and R6 are as defined in formula I; R° and Rl and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic or heteroaryl ring; and R is defined as R2 in formula I. The compounds including preferred compounds and salts, as well as methods of synthesis are described in more detail below.
The invention further encompasses a method for modulation of premature translation termination or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay in a cell comprising contacting __ _ _ a cell exhibiting premature translation termination or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay with an effective amount of a compound of the formula V:
Figure imgf000007_0001
V or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymorphs, stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers thereof wherein:
X is oxygen, sulfur, CO, SO or S(O)2; Y is oxygen or sulfur; Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl; n is an integer from 0 to 4;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R7, CF3, CN, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R° is hydrogen, or taken together with R1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring;
R2, R3, R4 and R5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, orN(R7)2;
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R7 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3.
In a preferred embodiment of the invention, the compounds of formulas I, II, III, IV and V are pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymorphs, bio-hydrolyzable esters, racemates, or purified stereoisomers including, but not limited to, optically pure enantiomers and diastereomers.
The invention further encompasses methods of treating or preventing a disease ameliorated by modulation of premature translation termination or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay, or ameliorating one or more symptoms associated therewith comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the formula V and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, solvates, clathrates, prodrugs or polymorphs thereof. In a preferred embodiment, the disease is a genetic disease; a CNS disease; an inflammatory disease; a neurodegenerative disease; an autoimmune disease; a proliferative disease, in particular cancer; a cardiovascular disease; or a pulmonary disease; more preferably the disease includes, but is not limited to, amyloidosis, LINCL, hemophilia, Alzheimer's disease, atherosclerosis, giantism, dwarfism, hypothyroidism, hyperthyroidism, cystic fibrosis, aging, obesity, Parkinson's disease, Niemann Pick's disease, cystic fibrosis, familial hypercholesterolemia, retinitis pigmentosa, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, or Marfan syndrome. The invention further encompasses methods of treating or preventing, or ameliorating a genetic disease one or more symptoms associated with or manifestations of a genetic disease comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the formula V and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, solvates, clathrates, prodrugs or polymorphs thereof, hi a preferred embodiment, the disease is a CNS disease; an inflammatory disease; a neurodegenerative disease; a cardiovascular disease; an autoimmune disease; cancer; more preferably, the genetic disease includes, but is not limited to, amyloidosis, LINCL, hemophilia, Alzheimer's disease, atherosclerosis, giantism, dwarfism, hypothyroidism, hyperthyroidism, cystic fibrosis, aging, obesity, Parkinson's disease, Niemann Pick's disease, cystic fibrosis, familial hypercholesterolemia, retinitis pigmentosa, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, or Marfan syndrome.
The invention further relates to methods of treating, preventing, or ameliorating cancer or one or more symptoms associated with or manifestations of cancer comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the formula V and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, solvates, clathrates, prodrugs or polymoφhs thereof.
In a preferred embodiment of the invention, the patient is a mammal, more preferably a human susceptible to or at risk of acquiring a genetic disease, hi an alternative embodiment, the patient has undergone a screening process to determine the presence of a nonsense mutation comprising the steps of screening a subject or cells extracted therefrom by an acceptable nonsense mutation screening assay, hi a related embodiment, the therapy is personalized in that the patient is screened for a nonsense mutation screening assay and treated by the administration of one or more compounds of the invention; particularly, the patient may be treated with a compound particularly suited for the mutations in question; e.g., depending upon the disease type, cell type, and the gene in question. In a further embodiment, the patient is an infant or child. In yet another embodiment, the invention encompassing the treatment of pregnant woman or the fetus directly.
In a still preferred embodiment of the invention, the compound is administered parenterally, transdermally, mucosally, nasally, buccally, sublingually, or orally; more preferably the compound is administered orally, most preferably the compound is administered orally in the form of a tablet or capsule.
The invention encompasses methods for modulating premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay. The invention further encompasses a method for suppressing premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay in a cell comprising contacting a cell exhibiting premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay with an effective amount of a compound of formula I, II, III, IV or V. The invention further encompasses a method for inducing nonsense suppression in a cell comprising contacting a cell exhibiting a nonsense mutation with an effective amount of a compound of formula I, II, III, IV or V. A nonsense codon can be present in the DNA or RNA of any type of cell and can arise naturally or result from mutagenesis. Accordingly, cells encompassed by the present methods include animal cells, mammalian cells, bacterial cells, plant cells and virally infected cells. In one embodiment, the nonsense codon was present in the progenitor DNA. In another embodiment, the nonsense codon resulted from mutagenesis.
Without being limited to any particular theory, the ability of the compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V to promote readthrough of stop codons makes them useful in the treatment or prevention of any disease which is caused in whole or in part by a nonsense mutation. Such diseases can occur due to the decreased amount of active protein produced as a result of premature termination of translation. Without being limited to any particular theory, the compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V allow the translation of mRNA to continue past the nonsense mutation resulting in the production of full length protein. A powerful aspect of the invention is that the therapeutic activity of compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V are not necessarily disease specific, instead are effective at treating of preventing any disease associated with a nonsense mutation. Further, the methods of the invention may be patient specific. That is, a patient may be screened to determine if this disease is associated with a nonsense mutation. If so, they can be treated with a compound of the invention. The compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V are useful for treating or preventing genetic diseases. Genetic diseases that can be treated or prevented by compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V include cancer, autoimmune disease, blood disease, collagen disease, diabetes, inflammatory diseases or a central nervous system disease.
3.1 DEFINITIONS
As used herein, "premature translation termination" refers to the result of a mutation that changes a codon corresponding to an amino acid to a stop codon.
As used herein, "nonsense-mediated mRNA decay" refers to any mechanism that mediates the decay of mRNAs containing a premature translation termination codon. As used herein, a "premature termination codon" or "premature stop codon" refers to the occurrence of a stop codon where a codon corresponding to an amino acid should be.
As used herein, a "nonsense mutation" is a point mutation changing a codon corresponding to an amino acid to a stop codon.
As used herein, "nonsense suppression" refers to the inhibition or suppression of premature translation and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay.
As used herein, "modulation of premature translation termination and/or nonsense- mediated mRNA decay" refers to the regulation of gene expression by altering the level of nonsense suppression. For example, if it is desirable to increase production of a defective protein encoded by a gene with a premature stop codon, i.e., to permit readthrough of the premature stop codon of the disease gene so translation of the gene can occur, then modulation of premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay entails up-regulation of nonsense suppression. Conversely, if it is desirable to promote the degradation of an mRNA with a premature stop codon, then modulation of premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decays entails down-regulation of nonsense suppression.
As used herein, the term "patient" means an animal (e.g., cow, horse, sheep, pig, chicken, turkey, quail, cat, dog, mouse, rat, rabbit, guinea pig, etc.), preferably a mammal such as a non-primate and a primate (e.g. , monkey and human), most preferably a human. In certain embodiments, the patient is an infant, child, adolescent or adult. In one embodiment, it has been determined through pre-screening that the patient possesses a nonsense mutation, hi another embodiment, it has been determined through pre-screening which non-sense mutation the patient has (i.e., UAA, UGA, or UAG). In another embodiment, the patient is infected with bacterial cells (e.g., Pseudomonas aeruginosa). In another embodiment, the cells of the patient are virally infected.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified, the term "substituted" means a group substituted by one to four or more substituents, such as, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aroyl, cycloalkyl, halo, haloalkyl (e.g., trifluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, fluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, difluoromethoxy, fluoromethoxy), haloalkoxy, hydroxy, alkoxy, cycloalkyoxy, heterocylooxy, oxo, alkanoyl, aryl, aryloxy, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, alkylheteroaryl, heterocyclo, alkanoyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, aralkylamino, cycloalkylamino, heterocycloamino, mono and disubstituted amino (in which the two substituents on the amino group are selected from alkyl, aryl, aralkyl), alkanoylamino, aroylamino, aralkanoylamino, substituted alkanoylamino, substituted arylamino, substituted aralkanoylamino, thiol, alkylthio, arylthio, aralkylthio, cycloalkylthio, heterocyclothio, alkylthiono, arylthiono, aralkylthiono, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, aralkylsulfonyl, sulfonamido (e.g., SO2NH2), substituted sulfonamido, nitro, cyano, carboxy, carbamyl (e.g. CONH2), substituted carbamyl (e.g., CONH alkyl, CONH aryl, CONH aralkyl or instances where there are two substituents on the nitrogen selected from alkyl, aryl or aralkyl), alkoxycarbonyl, aryl, substituted aryl, guanidino,heterocycloalkyl, substituted heterocycloalkyl, heterocycloaryl and substituted heterocycloaryl (such as, indolyl, imidazolyl, furyl, thienyl, thiazolyl, pyrrolidyl, pyridyl, pyrimidyl and the like). In one embodiment, the substituent is -O-alkyl-C(=O)-heterocyclo (substituted or unsubstituted), wherein alkyl and heterocyclo are defined above. Wherein, as noted above, the substituents themselves are further substituted, such further substituents are selected from the group consisting of halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclo, cycloalkyl, and arylalkyl. As used herein, unless otherwise specified, the term "alkyl" means a saturated straight chain or branched non-cyclic hydrocarbon having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms, preferably 1-10 carbon atoms and most preferably 1-4 carbon atoms. Representative saturated straight chain alkyls include -methyl, -ethyl, -n-propyl, -n-butyl, -n-pentyl, -n- hexyl, -n-heptyl, -n-octyl, -n-nonyl and -n-decyl; while saturated branched alkyls include - isopropyl, -sec-butyl, -isobutyl, -tert-butyl, -isopentyl, 2-methylbutyl, 3-methylbutyl, 2- methylpentyl, 3-methylpentyl, 4-methylpentyl, 2-methylhexyl, 3-methylhexyl, 4- methylhexyl, 5-methylhexyl, 2,3-dimethylbutyl, 2,3-dimethylpentyl, 2,4-dimethylpentyl, 2,3-dimethylhexyl, 2,4-dimethylhexyl, 2,5-dimethylhexyl, 2,2-dimethylpentyl, 2,2- dimethylhexyl, 3,3-dimtheylpentyl, 3,3-dimethylhexyl, 4,4-dimethylhexyl, 2-ethylpentyl, 3- ethylpentyl, 2-ethylhexyl, 3-ethylhexyl, 4-ethylhexyl, 2-methyl-2-ethylpentyl, 2-methyl-3- ethylpentyl, 2-methyl-4-ethylpentyl, 2-methyl-2-ethylhexyl, 2-methyl-3-ethylhexyl, 2- methyl-4-ethylhexyl, 2,2-diethylpentyl, 3,3-diethylhexyl, 2,2-diethylhexyl, 3,3-diethylhexyl and the like. An alkyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted. Unsaturated alkyl groups include alkenyl groups and alkynyl groups, which are discussed below.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "alkenyl group" means a straight chain or branched non-cyclic hydrocarbon having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2-10 carbon atoms, most preferably 2-6 carbon atoms, and including at least one carbon-carbon double bond. Representative straight chain and branched (C2-C10)alkenyls include -vinyl, -allyl, -1-butenyl, -2-butenyl, -isobutylenyl, -1-pentenyl, -2-pentenyl, -3- methyl-1-butenyl, -2-methyl-2-butenyl, -2,3-dimethyl-2-butenyl, -1-hexenyl, -2-hexenyl, -3- hexenyl, -1-heptenyl, -2-heptenyl, -3-heptenyl, -1-octenyl, -2-octenyl, -3-octenyl, -1- nonenyl, -2-nonenyl, -3-nonenyl, -1-decenyl, -2-decenyl, -3-decenyl and the like. The double bond of an alkenyl group can be unconjugated or conjugated to another unsaturated group. An alkenyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "alkynyl group" means a straight chain or branched non-cyclic hydrocarbon having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 2-10 carbon atoms, most preferably 2-6 carbon atoms, and including at lease one carbon-carbon triple bond. Representative straight chain and branched -(C2-C10)alkynyls include -acetylenyl, -propynyl, -1-butynyl, -2-butynyl. -1-pentynyl, -2-pentynyl, -3-methyl- 1-butynyl, -4-pentynyl, -1-hexynyl, -2-hexynyl, -5-hexynyl, -1-heptynyl, -2-heptynyl, -6- heptynyl, -1-octynyl, -2-octynyl, -7-octynyl, -1-nonynyl, -2-nonynyl, -8-nonynyl, -1- decynyl, -2-decynyl, -9-decynyl, and the like. The triple bond of an alkynyl group can be unconjugated or conjugated to another unsaturated group. An alkynyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "halogen'Or "halo" means fluorine, chlorine, bromine, or iodine. As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "haloalkyl" means -alkyl substituted with one or more halogens, wherein alkyl and halogen are defined as above, including -CF3, -CHF2, -CH2F, -CC13, -CHC12, -CBr3, -CHBr2, -CH2CF3, - CH2CHF2, - CH2CH2F, and the like.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "alkyl sulfonyl" means -SO3- alkyl, wherein alkyl is defined as above, including -SO2-CH3, -SO2-CH2CH3, -SO2- (CH2)2CH3, -SO2-(CH2)3CH3, -SO2-(CH2)4CH3, -SO2-(CH2)5CH3, and the like.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "sulfonyl alkyl" means -Alkyl- SO H, wherein alkyl is defined as above.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "carboxyl" and "carboxy" mean -COOH or a salt thereof (e.g, -COO"Na+).
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "alkoxy" means -O-(alkyl), wherein alkyl is defined above, including -OCH3, -OCH2CH3, -O(CH2)2CH3) -O(CH2)3CH3, -O(CH2)4CH3, -O(CH2)5CH3, and the like.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "alkoxycarbonyl" means - C(=O)O-(alkyl), wherein alkyl is defined above, including -C(=O)O-CH3, -C(=O)O- CH2CH3, -C(=O)O-(CH2)2CH3, -C(=O)O-(CH2)3CH3, -C(=O)O-(CH2)4CH3, -C(=O)O- (CH2)5CH3, and the like. In a preferred embodiment, the esters are biohydrolyzable (i.e., the ester is hydrolyzed to a carboxylic acid in vitro or in vivo). As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "haloalkoxy" means -alkoxy substituted with one or more halogens, wherein alkoxy and halogen are defined as above, including -OCF3, -OCHF2, - OCH2F, -OCC13, -OCHC12, -OCBr3, -OCHBr2, -OCH2CF3, -OCH2CHF2, -OCH2CH2F, and the like.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "alkoxycarbonyl" means - C(=O)O-(alkyl), wherein alkyl is defined above, including -C(=O)O-CH3, -C(=O)O- CH2CH3, -C(=O)O-(CH2)2CH3, -C(=O)O-(CH2)3CH3, -C(=O)O-(CH2)4CH3, -C(=O)O- (CH2)5CH3, and the like. In a preferred embodiment, the esters are biohydrolyzable (i.e., the ester is hydrolyzed to a carboxylic acid in vitro or in vivo).
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "alkylcarbonyl" means - C(=O)=(alkyl), wherein alkyl is defined above, including -C(=O)-CH3, -C(=O)-CH2CH3, - C(=O)-(CH2)2CH3, -C(=O)-(CH2)3CH3, -C(=O)-(CH2)4CH3, -C(=O)-(CH2)5CH3, and the like.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "carboxyalky " means -(alkyl)- carboxy, wherein alkyl and carboxy are defined above, including -CH2-COOH, -(CH2)2- COOH, -(CH2)3-COOH, -(CH2)4-COOH, and the like.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "aryl" means a carbocychc aromatic ring containing from 5 to 14 ring atoms. The ring atoms of a carbocychc aryl group are all carbon atoms. Aryl ring structures include compounds having one or more ring structures such as mono-, bi-, or tricyclic compounds as well as benzo-fused carbocychc moieties such as 5,6,7,8-tefrahydronaphthyl and the like. Preferably, the aryl group is a monocyclic ring or bicyclic ring. Representative aryl groups include phenyl, tolyl, anthracenyl, fluorenyl, indenyl, azulenyl, phenanthrenyl and naphthyl. A carbocyclic aryl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "heteroaryl" means a carbocyclic aromatic ring containing from 5 to 14 ring atoms and the ring atoms contain at least one heteroatom, preferably 1 to 3 heteroatoms, independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur. Heteroaryl ring structures include compounds having one or more ring structures such as mono-, bi-, or tricyclic compounds as well as fused heterocyclic moities. Representative heteroaryls are triazolyl, tetrazolyl, oxadiazolyl, pyridyl, furyl, benzofuranyl, thiophenyl, benzothiophenyl, benzoisoxazolyl, benzoisothiazolyl, quinolinyl, pyrrolyl, indolyl, oxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, imidazolyl, benzimidazolyl, thiazolyl, benzothiazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyrazolyl, isothiazolyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, cimiolinyl, phthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, benzoquinazolinyl, acridinyl, pyrimidyl, oxazolyl, benzo[l,3]dioxole and 2,3-dihydro-benzo[l,4]dioxine. A heteroaryl group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "aryloxy" means -O-aryl group, wherein aryl is as defined above. An aryloxy group can be unsubstituted or substituted.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term"arylalkyl" means -(alkyl)-(aryl), wherein alkyl and aryl are defined above, including, but not limited to -(CH2)phenyl, - (CH2)2phenyl, -(CH2)3phenyl, -CH(phenyl)2, -CH(phenyl)3, -(CH2)tolyl, -(CH2)anthracenyl, -(CH2)fluorenyl, -(CH2)indenyl, -(CH2)azulenyl, -(CH2)naphthyl, and the like.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term"alkylaryl" means -(aryl)-(alkyl), wherein alkyl and aryl are defined above, including, but not limited to 2-methyl-phenyl, 3- methyl-phenyl, 4-methyl-phenyl, 5-methyl-phenyl, 2,3-dimethylphenyl, 2,4-dimethyl- phenyl, 2,5-dimethylphenyl, 3,4-dimethyl-phenyl, 3,5-dimethyl-phenyl, 2-ethyl-phenyl, 3- ethyl-phenyl, 4-ethyl-phenyl, 5-ethyl-phenyl, 2-isopropyl-phenyl, 3-isopropyl-phenyl, 4- isopropyl-phenyl, 5-isopropyl-phenyl, 4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenyl, 3-isopropyl-5-methyl- phenyl and the like. As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term"heteroarylalkyl" means -
(alkyl)-(heteroaryl), wherein alkyl and heteroaryl are defined above, including, but not limited to -(CH2)pyridyl, -(CH2)2pyridyl, -(CH2)3pyridyl, -CH(pyridyl)2, -C(pyridyl)3, - (CH2)triazolyl, -(CH2)tetrazolyl, -(CH2)oxadiazolyl, -(CH2)furyl, -(CH2)benzofuranyl, - (CH2)thiophenyl, -(CH2)benzothiophenyl, and the like. As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "alkylheteroaryl" means -( heteroaryl)-( alkyl), wherein heteroaryl and alkyl are defined above, including, but not limited to, -pyridyl-(CH3), -triazolyl-(CH3), -thiazolyl-(CH3), -tetrazolyl-(CH3), - oxadiazolyl-(CH3), -furyl-(CH3), -benzofuranyl-(CH3), -thiophenyl-(CH3), - benzothiophenyl-(CH3), and the like wherein each alkyl group can be further substituted. As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "arylalkyloxy" means -O-
(alkyl)-(aryl), wherein alkyl and aryl are defined above, including, but not limited to -O- (CH2)2phenyl, -O-(CH2)3phenyl, -O-CH(phenyl)2, -O-CH(phenyl)3, -O-(CH2)tolyl, -O- (CH2)anthracenyl, -O-(CH2)fluorenyl, -O-(CH2)indenyl, -O-(CH2)azulenyl, -O- (CH2)naphthyl, and the like. As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "cycloalkyl" means a monocyclic or polycyclic saturated ring comprising carbon and hydrogen atoms and having no carbon-carbon multiple bonds. A cycloalkyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted. Examples of cycloalkyl groups include, but are not limited to, (C3_C )cycloalkyl groups, including cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cycloheptyl, and saturated cyclic and bicyclic terpenes. A cycloalkyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted. Preferably, the cycloalkyl group is a monocyclic ring or bicyclic ring.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "heterocyclyl" and "heterocyclo" means a monocyclic or polycyclic ring comprising carbon and hydrogen atoms, optionally having 1 or 2 multiple bonds, and the ring atoms contain at least one heteroatom, preferably 1 to 3 heteroatoms, independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. Heterocyclyl ring structures include compounds having one or more ring structures such as mono-, bi-, or tricylic compounds. Preferably, the heterocyclyl group is a monocyclic ring or bicyclic ring. Representative heterocycles include, but are not limited to morpholinyl, pyrrolidinonyl, pyrrolidinyl, piperidinyl, hydantoinyl, valerolactamyl, t _ ^ ^ _ _ oxiranyl, oxetanyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetraliydropyranyl, tetrahydropyridinyl, tefrahydroprimidinyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, and the like. A heterocyclyl ring can be unsubstituted or substituted.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "cycloalkyloxy" means -O- (cycloalkyl), wherein cycloalkyl is defined above, including -O-cyclopropyl, -O-cyclobutyl, -O-cyclopentyl, -O-cyclohexyl, -O-cycloheptyl and the like.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "cycloalkylalkyloxy" means -O- (alkyl)-(cycloalkyl), wherein cycloalkyl and alkyl are defined above, including, but not limited to -O-cyclopropyl, -O-cyclobutyl, -O-cyclopentyl, -O-cyclohexyl, -O-cycloheptyl and the like.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "heterocycloalkyl" means - (alkyl)-(heterocyclo), wherein heterocyclo and alkyl are defined above, including, but not limited to -CH2-morpholinyl, -CH2-pyrrolidinonyl, -CH2-pyrrolidinyl, -(CH2)2- piperidinyl, -(CH2)3 -piperidinyl, -(CH2)4-piperidinyl, -CH2-hydantoinyl and the like. As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "aminoalkoxy" means -O-
(alkyl)-NH2, wherein alkyl is defined above, including, but not limited to -O-CH2-NH2, -O- (CH2)2-NH2, -O-(CH2)3-NH2, -O-(CH2)4-NH2, -O-(CH2)5-NH2, and the like.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "alkylamino" means -NH(alkyl) or -N(alkyl)(alkyl), wherein alkyl is defined above, including, but not limited to NHCH3, - NHCH2CH3, -NH(CH2)2CH3, -NH(CH2)3CH3, -NH(CH2) CH3, -NH(CH2)5CH3, -N(CH3)2, - N(CH2CH3)2, -N((CH2)2CH3)2, -N(CH3)(CH2CH3), and the like.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "arylamino" means -NH(aryl), wherein aryl is defined above, including, but not limited to -NH(phenyl), -NH(tolyl), - NH(anthracenyl), -NH(fluorenyl), -NH(indenyl), -NH(azulenyl), -NH(pyridinyl), - NH(naphthyl), and the like.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "arylalkylamino" means -NH- (alkyl)-(aryl), wherein alkyl and aryl are defined above, including -NH-CH2-(phenyl), -NH- CH2-(tolyl), -NH-CH2-(anthracenyl), -NH-CH2-(fluorenyl), -NH-CH2-(indenyl), -NH-CH2- (azulenyl), -NH-CH2-(pyridinyl), -NH-CH2-(naphthyl), -NH-(CH2)2-(ρhenyl) and the like. As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "cycloalkylamino" means -NH-
(cycloalkyl), wherein cycloalkyl is defined above, including -NH-cyclopropyl, -NH- cyclobutyl, -NH-cyclopentyl, -NH-cyclohexyl, -NH-cycloheptyl, and the like. As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "aminoalkyl" means -(alkyl)- NH2, wherein alkyl is defined above, including -CH2-NH2, -(CH2)2-NH2, -(CH2)3-NH2, - (CH2)4-NH2, -(CH2)5-NH2 and the like.
As used herein, unless otherwise specified the term "alkylaminoalkyi" means - (alkyl)-NH(alkyl) or -(alkyl)-N(alkyl)(alkyl), wherein each "alkyl" is independently an alkyl group defined above, including -CH2-NH-CH3, -CH2-NHCH2CH3, -CH2- NH(CH2)2CH3, -CH2-NH(CH2)3CH3, -CH2-NH(CH2)4CH3, -CH2-NH(CH2)5CH3, -(CH2)2- NH-CH3, -CH2-N(CH3)2, -CH2-N(CH2CH3)2, -CH2-N((CH2)2CH3)2, -CH2- N(CH3)(CH2CH3), -(CH2)2-N(CH3)2, and the like. As used herein, a "therapeutically effective amount" refers to that amount of the compound of the invention or other active ingredient sufficient to provide a therapeutic benefit in the treatment or management of the disease or to delay or minimize symptoms associated with the disease. Further, a therapeutically effective amount with respect to a compound of the invention means that amount of therapeutic agent alone, or in combination with other therapies, that provides a therapeutic benefit in the treatment or management of the disease. Used in connection with an amount of a compound of the invention, the term can encompass an amount that improves overall therapy, reduces or avoids symptoms or causes of disease, or enhances the therapeutic efficacy of or synergies with another therapeutic agent. As used herein, a "prophylactically effective amount" refers to that amount of a compound of the invention or other active ingredient sufficient to result in the prevention, recurrence or spread of the disease. A prophylactically effective amount may refer to the amount sufficient to prevent initial disease or the recurrence or spread of the disease or the occurrence of the disease in a patient, including but not limited to those predisposed to the disease. A prophylactically effective amount may also refer to the amount that provides a prophylactic benefit in the prevention of the disease. Further, a prophylactically effective amount with respect to a compound of the invention means that amount alone, or in combination with other agents, that provides a prophylactic benefit in the prevention of the disease. Used in connection with an amount of a compound of the invention, the term can encompass an amount that improves overall prophylaxis or enhances the prophylactic efficacy of or synergies with another prophylactic agent.
As used herein, a "therapeutic protocol" refers to a regimen of timing and dosing of one or more therapeutic agents. As used herein, a "prophylactic protocol" refers to a regimen of timing and dosing of one or more prophylactic agents.
A used herein, a "protocol" includes dosing schedules and dosing regimens.
As used herein, "in combination" refers to the use of more than one prophylactic and/or therapeutic agents.
As used herein, the terms "manage", "managing" and "management" refer to the beneficial effects that a subject derives from a prophylactic or therapeutic agent, which does not result in a cure of the disease. In certain embodiments, a subject is administered one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents to "manage" a disease so as to prevent the progression or worsening of the disease.
As used herein, the terms "prevent", " preventing" and "prevention" refer to the prevention of the onset, recurrence, or spread of the disease in a subject resulting from the administration of a prophylactic or therapeutic agent.
As used herein, the terms "treat", "treating" and "treatment" refer to the eradication or amelioration of the disease or symptoms associated with the disease. In certain embodiments, such terms refer to minimizing the spread or worsening of the disease resulting from the administration of one or more prophylactic or therapeutic agents to a subject with such a disease.
As used herein, the term "pharmaceutically acceptable salts" refer to salts prepared from pharmaceutically acceptable non-toxic acids or bases including inorganic acids and bases and organic acids and bases. Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable base addition salts for the compound of the present invention include, but are not limited to, metallic salts made from aluminum, calcium, lithium, magnesium, potassium, sodium and zinc or organic salts made from lysine, N,N'-dibenzylethylenediamine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, meglumine (N-methylglucamine) and procaine. Suitable non-toxic acids include, but are not limited to, inorganic and organic acids such as acetic, alginic, anthranilic, benzenesulfonic, benzoic, camphorsulfonic, citric, ethenesulfonic, formic, fumaric, furoic, galacturonic, gluconic, glucuronic, glutamic, glycolic, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, isethionic, lactic, maleic, malic, mandelic, methanesulfonic, mucic, nitric, pamoic, pantothenic, phenylacetic, phosphoric, propionic, salicylic, stearic, succinic, sulfanilic, sulfuric, tartaric acid, and p-toluenesulfonic acid. Specific non-toxic acids include hydrochloric, hydrobromic, phosphoric, sulfuric, and methanesulfonic acids. Examples of specific salts thus include hydrochloride and mesylate salts. Other examples of salts are well known in the art, see, e.g., Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990).
As used herein and unless otherwise indicated, the term "polymorph" refers to solid crystalline forms of a compound of the present invention or complex thereof. Different polymoφhs of the same compound can exhibit different physical, chemical and/or spectroscopic properties. Different physical properties include, but are not limited to stability (e.g., to heat or light), compressibility and density (important in formulation and product manufacturing), and dissolution rates (which can affect bioavailability). Differences in stability can result from changes in chemical reactivity (e.g., differential oxidation, such that a dosage form discolors more rapidly when comprised of one polymoφh than when comprised of another polymoφh) or mechanical characteristics (e.g., tablets crumble on storage as a kinetically favored polymoφh converts to thennodynamically more stable polymoφh) or both (e.g., tablets of one polymoφh are more susceptible to breakdown at high humidity). Different physical properties of polymoφhs can affect their processing. For example, one polymoφh might be more likely to form solvates or might be more difficult to filter or wash free of impurities than another due to, for example, the shape or size distribution of particles of it.
As used herein, the term "hydrate" means a compound of the present invention or a salt thereof, that further includes a stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amount of water bound by non-covalent intermolecular forces.
As used herein, he term "clathrate" means a compound of the present invention or a salt thereof in the fonn of a crystal lattice that contains spaces (e.g., channels) that have a guest molecule (e.g., a solvent or water) trapped within.
As used herein and unless otherwise indicated, the term "prodrug" means a derivative of a compound that can hydrolyze, oxidize, or otherwise react under biological conditions (in vitro or in vivo) to provide an active compound, particularly a compound of the invention. Examples of prodrugs include, but are not limited to, derivatives and metabolites of a compound of the invention that include biohydrolyzable moieties such as biohydrolyzable amides, biohydrolyzable esters, biohydrolyzable carbamates, biohydrolyzable carbonates, biohydrolyzable ureides, and biohydrolyzable phosphate analogues. Preferably, prodrugs of compounds with carboxyl functional groups are the lower alkyl esters of the carboxylic acid. The carboxylate esters are conveniently formed by esterifying any of the carboxylic acid moieties present on the molecule. Prodrugs can typically be prepared using well-known methods, such as those described by Burger 's Medicinal Chemistry and Drug Discovery 6th ed. (Donald J. Abraham ed., 2001, Wiley) and£>e5?g77 and Application of Prodrugs (H. Bundgaard erf., 1985, Harwood Academic Publishers Gmfh).
As used herein and unless otherwise indicated, the terms "biohydrolyzable amide," "biohydrolyzable ester," "biohydrolyzable carbamate," "biohydrolyzable carbonate," "biohydrolyzable ureide," "biohydrolyzable phosphate" mean an amide, ester, carbamate, carbonate, ureide, or phosphate, respectively, of a compound that either: 1) does not interfere with the biological activity of the compound but can confer upon that compound advantageous properties in vivo, such as uptake, duration of action, or onset of action; or 2) is biologically inactive but is converted in vivo to the biologically active compound. Examples of biohydrolyzable esters include, but are not limited to, lower alkyl esters, alkoxyacyloxy esters, alkyl acylamino alkyl esters, and choline esters. Examples of biohydrolyzable amides include, but are not limited to, lower alkyl amides, α-amino acid amides, alkoxyacyl amides, and alkylaminoalkylcarbonyl amides. Examples of biohydrolyzable carbamates include, but are not limited to, lower alkylamines, substituted ethylenediamines, aminoacids, hydroxyalkylamines, heterocyclic and heteroaromatic amines, and polyether amines.
As used herein and unless otherwise indicated, the term "optically pure" or "stereomerically pure" means a the stereoisomer of a compound is substantially free of the other stereoisomers of that compound. For example, a stereomerically pure compound having one chiral center will be substantially free of the opposite enantiomer of the compound. A stereomerically pure compound having two chiral centers will be substantially free of other diastereomers of the compound. A typical stereomerically pure compound comprises greater than about 80% by weight of one stereoisomer of the compound and less than about 20% by weight of other stereoisomers of the compound, more preferably greater than about 90% by weight of one stereoisomer of the compound and less than about 10% by weight of the other stereoisomers of the compound, even more preferably greater than about 95% by weight of one stereoisomer of the compound and less than about 5% by weight of the other stereoisomers of the compound, and most preferably greater than about 97% by weight of one stereoisomer of the compound and less than about 3% by weight of the other stereoisomers of the compound.
As used herein and unless otherwise indicated, the term "enantiomerically pure" means a stereomerically pure composition of a compound having one chiral center. _ _ _ „ ^^
It should be noted that if there is a discrepancy between a depicted structure and a name given that structure, the depicted structure is to be accorded more weight. In addition, if the stereochemistry of a structure or a portion of a structure is not indicated with, for example, bold or dashed lines, the structure or portion of the structure is to be inteφreted as encompassing all stereoisomers of it.
4. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
4.1 COMPOUNDS OF THE INVENTION
This invention includes acetylamino benzoic acid compounds of formula I:
Figure imgf000021_0001
I or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymoφhs, stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers, thereof wherein:
X is oxygen, sulfur, CO, SO or S(O)2; Y is oxygen or sulfur;
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or xmsubstituted cycloalkyl; n is an integer from 0 to 4;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R7, CF3, CN, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R° is hydrogen, or taken together with R1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring; R2, R3, R4 and R5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or N(R7)2; n ,..„„ „ „ ^ .→,
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R7 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3; with the proviso that when X is O, Y is O, n is 0 and R1 is hydrogen, then Z is not 4- chlorophenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, or 2,4-dichlorophenyl; and with the proviso that when X is O, Y is O, n is 0, R1 is hydrogen, and Z is unsubstituted phenyl at least one of R2-R5 is not hydrogen; and with the proviso that when R3 is COOH, R2, R4, and R5 are not all halogen.
This invention further encompasses acetylamino benzoic acid compounds of the formula II:
Figure imgf000022_0001
II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, clathrate, or stereoisomer thereof wherein: X is oxygen or sulfur;
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, halogen, SO2R7, CF3, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R2, R3, R4 and R5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or NR7 2; and
Figure imgf000023_0001
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R7 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3; with the proviso that when X is O and R1 is hydrogen, then Z is not 4-chlorophenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, or 2,4-dichlorophenyl; and with the proviso that when X is O, R1 is hydrogen, and Z is unsubstituted phenyl at least one of R2-R5 is not hydrogen; and with the proviso that when R3 is COOH, R2, R4, and R5 are not all halogen.
This invention further encompasses acetylamino benzoic acid compounds of the formula III:
Figure imgf000023_0002
HI or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, clathrate, prodrug, polymoφh, enantiomer, diastereomer, racemate or mixture of stereoisomers thereof wherein:
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R2,CF3, CN, COOH, COR2, or COOR2; R is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOR2, SO2, NO2, NH2, or NR2 2; „ „ ,. _ _
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R2 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3; with the proviso that when R1 is hydrogen, then Z is not 4-chlorophenyl, 4- methylphenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, or 2,4-dichlorophenyl.
In a preferred embodiment of formula III, R is not hydrogen. hi another preferred embodiment of formula III, Z is 4-isopropyl-3 -methylphenyl, 3 -isopropyl-5 -methylphenyl, 2'-methyl-biphenyl-4-yl, 3'-methyl-biphenyl-4-yl, 4-propyl- phenyl, 4-(l,l-dimethyl-propyl)-phenyl, 5,6,7,8,-tetrahydronaphthalen-2-yl, 4-tert-butyl- phenyl, 4-cyclopentyl-phenyl, or 4-trifluoromethoxyphenyl, more preferably, Z is 4- isopropyl-3 -methylphenyl, 3-isopropyl-5-methylphenyl, 2'-methyl-biphenyl-4-yl, 3'- methyl-biphenyl-4-yl, 4-propyl-phenyl, 4-(l,l-dimethyl-propyl)-phenyl, 5,6,7,8,- tetrahydronaphthalen-2-yl, 4-tert-butyl-phenyl, 4-cyclopentyl-phenyl, or 4- trifluoromethoxyphenyl when R and Rl are both hydrogen. This invention further encompasses acetylamino benzoic acid compounds of the formula IV:
Figure imgf000024_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, clathrate, prodrug, polymoφh, enantiomer, diastereomer, racemate or mixture of stereoisomers thereof wherein:
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R° and R1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5- 7 membered heterocyclicor heteroaryl ring; R is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, ^ _ _ substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOR2, SO2, NO2, NH2, or NR2 2;
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occunence of R2 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or xmsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3.
Preferred compounds of the invention include, but are not limited to,
3 - [2-(4-isopropyl-3 -methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino] -benzoic acid;
3-[2-(3-isopropyl-5-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 3-[2-(4-trifluoromethoxy-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-iodo-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(indan-5-ylpxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-naphthalen-2-yloxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-{2-[4-(l-methyl-l-phenyl-ethyl)-phenoxy]-acetylamino}-benzoic acid; 3-[2-(4-tert-butyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-cyclopentyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-{2-[4-(l,l -dimethyl-propyl)-phenoxy] acetylamino)-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-propyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3 - [2-(4-trifluromethyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino-benzoic acid; 3-[2-(3,4-dichloro-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3 - [2-(4-Isopropyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino] -benzoic acid;
3 - [2-(2 ' -methyl-biphenyl-4-yloxy)-acetylamino] -benzoic acid;
3-[2-(3 '-methyl-biphenyl-4yloxy)-acetylamino-benzoic acid;
4-chloro-3-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 3-{N-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetyl-N-methylamino]}-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-thioacetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Isopropyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Isopropyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid Sodium Salt;
3-[3-(Indan-5-yloxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid; 3-[3-(Benzo[l,3]dioxol-5-yloxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-{2-Oxo-3-[4-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenoxy)-phenoxy]-pyrrolidin-l-yl}- benzoic acid;
3 - [3 -(3 -Ethyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin- 1 -yl] -benzoic acid; 3-[2-Oxo-3-(4-phenoxy-phenoxy)-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(2-Isopropyl-5-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(2-Isopropyl-5-methyl-phenoxy)-propionylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(5-Methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(2-Isopropyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino] -benzoic acid; 3-[2-(2-Isopropyl-5-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-4-methoxy-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(5-Isopropyl-2-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid, sodium salt;
3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-propionylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-4-methyl-benzoic acid; 3-[2-(4-Bromo-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Carboxy-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Acetyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(Naphthalen-2-yloxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(Benzo[l,3]dioxol-5-yloxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 3-[2-(4-Chloro-3-fluoro-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Hydroxymethyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
2-Hydroxy-5-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
2-Chloro-5-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
2,3,6-Trifluoro-5-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-2-methyl-benzoic acid;
3- {2-[4-(2-Ethoxycarbonyl-vinyl)-phenoxy]-acetylamino} -benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Benzyloxy-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Cyano-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-{2-[4-(5-Nitro-pyridin-2-ylamino)-phenoxy]-acetylamino}-benzoic acid; 3-[2-(4-Benzoylamino-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Phenylamino-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(3-Phenylamino-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3- {2-[4-(2,4-Dinitro-phenylamino)-phenoxy]-acetylamino} -benzoic acid;
3- {2- [4-(4-Trifluoromethyl-phenoxy)-ρhenoxy] -acetylamino} -benzoic acid; „ _. ... ^
3-[2-(4-Benzyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Phenoxy-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(5-Nitro-pyridin-2-yloxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3- {2-[4-(l ,3-Dioxo-l ,3-dihydro-isoindol-2-ylmethyl)-phenoxy]-acetylamino} - benzoic acid;
3-(2-{4-[4-(l,3-Dioxo-l,3-dihydro-isoindol-2-yl)-butoxymethyl]-phenoxy}- acetylamino)-benzoic acid;
3-{2-[4-(4,6-Dimethyl-pyrimidin-2-ylsulfanylmethyl)-phenoxy]-acetylamino}- benzoic acid; 3-[3-(4-Chloro-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Bromo-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin- 1 -yl]-benzoic acid;
3 - [2-(4-Cyanomethyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino] -benzoic acid;
3- {2-[4-(2H-Tetrazol-5-ylmethyl)-phenoxy]-acetylamino} -benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Isopropyl-benzyloxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid; 3 - {2- [4-(5 -Phenyl- [1,3,4] oxadiazol-2-ylmethyl)-phenoxy] -acetylamino } -benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Nitro-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin- 1 -yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Methoxy-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin- 1 -yl]-benzoic acid;
3 - [3 -(4-Ethyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin- 1 -yl] -benzoic acid; 3-[3-(4-Methyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-Oxo-3-(2,3,5-trifluoro-4-methyl-phenoxy)-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-Oxo-3-(4-trifluoromethoxy-phenoxy)-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(3-Isopropyl-5-methyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-tert-Butyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pynolidin- 1 -yl]-benzoic acid; 3-[3-(3,4-Dimethyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, solvates, clathrates and stereoisomers thereof; more preferably 3-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 3 - [2-(3 -isopropyl-5-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino] -benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-trifluoromethoxy-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-iodo-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(indan-5-ylpxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(5,6,7J8-tetrahydro-naphthalen-2-yloxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 3-{2-[4-(l-methyl-l-phenyl-ethyl)-phenoxy]-acetylamino}-benzoic acid; _ _ „ „ _ ^
3-[2-(4-tert-butyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3 - [2-(4-cyclopentyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino] -benzoic acid;
3-{2-[4-(l,l -dimethyl-propyl)-phenoxy] acetylamino)-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-propyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 3-[2-(4-trifluromethyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino-benzoic acid;
3 - [2-(3 ,4-dichloro-phenoxy)-acetylamino] -benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(2'-methyl-biphenyl-4-yloxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(3 '-methyl-biphenyl-4yloxy)-acetylamino-benzoic acid; 4-chloro-3-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3 - {N- [2-(4-isopropyl-3 -methyl-phenoxy)-acetyl-N-methylamino] } -benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-thioacetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Isopropyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid; 3-[3-(4-Isopropyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid Sodium
Salt;
3-[3-(Indan-5-yloxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(Benzo[ 1 ,3]dioxol-5-yloxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin- 1 -yl]-benzoic acid;
3-{2-Oxo-3-[4-(4-trifluoromethyl-phenoxy)-phenoxy]-pyrrolidin-l-yl}- benzoic acid;
3 - [3 -(3 -Ethyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin- 1 -yl] -benzoic acid;
3-[2-Oxo-3-(4-phenoxy-phenoxy)-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, solvates, clathrates and stereoisomers thereof.
The compounds of formulas I, II, III, IV and V and those listed above are herein referred to as "compounds of the invention". Exemplary compounds of the invention are depicted in Table 1 below. While all compounds of the invention listed in Table 1 fall into formula V and may be utilized in the methods of the invention, it is within the skill of the trained artisan to recognize that not all compounds fall within the novel compound classes of formula I, II, and III. Table 1
Compoxmd Compoxmd Name Melting Activity Point (°C)
3 - [2-(3 ,4-dimethyl-phenoxy)- 201-202 acetylamino]-benzoic acid
Figure imgf000029_0001
3-[2-(4-chloro-phenoxy) - 218-219 acetylamino] -benzoic acid
Figure imgf000029_0002
3 - [2-(2-isoproρyl-phenylsulfanyl)- 178-179 acetylamino] -benzoic acid;
Figure imgf000029_0003
3-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl- 191-192 *** phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
Figure imgf000029_0004
3 - [2-(3 -isopropyl-5-methyl- 183-184 *** phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
Figure imgf000029_0005
3 -[2-(3 -isopropyl-phenoxy)- 166-167 acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
Figure imgf000029_0006
Compoxmd Compoxmd Name Melting Activity Point (°C)
3 - [2-(4-isopropyl-phenoxy)- 171-174 *# acetylaminoj-benzoic acid;
Figure imgf000030_0001
3-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl- 174-175 phenoxy)-thioacetylamino]- benzoic acid;
Figure imgf000030_0002
3-[2-(2'-methyl-biρhen-4-yloxy)- 220-221 *** acetylamino] -benzoic acid;
Figure imgf000030_0003
3-[2-(3'-methyl-biphen-4-yloxy)- 225-226 *** acetylamino] -benzoic acid
Figure imgf000030_0004
10
3-[2-(4'-methyl-biphen-4-yloxy)- 265-267 acetylamino] -benzoic acid
Figure imgf000030_0005
11
3-[2-(3,4-dichlorophenoxy)- 219-221 ** acetylaminoj-benzoic acid;
Figure imgf000030_0006
12
3-[2-(biρhen-4-yloxy)- 245-246 acetylaminoj-benzoic acid
Figure imgf000030_0007
Figure imgf000031_0001
Figure imgf000032_0001
Figure imgf000033_0001
Figure imgf000034_0001
Figure imgf000035_0001
Figure imgf000036_0001
Figure imgf000037_0001
Compound Compound Name Melting Activity Point (°C)
3- {2-[4-(5-Nitro-pyridin-2- 284-285 ylamino)-phenoxy] -acetylamino } - benzoic acid
Figure imgf000038_0001
63
3 - [2-(4-B enzoylamino-phenoxy)- 260-262 acetylamino]-benzoic acid
Figure imgf000038_0002
64
3 - [2-(4-Phenylarnino-phenoxy)- 214-215 acetylamino] -benzoic acid
Figure imgf000038_0003
65
3-[2-(3-Phenylamino-phenoxy)- 189-191 acetylamino] -benzoic acid
Figure imgf000038_0004
66
3-{2-[4-(2,4-Dinitro- 237-238 phenylamino)-phenoxy] - acetylamino} -benzoic acid
Figure imgf000038_0005
67
3- {2-[4-(4-Trifluoromethyl- 189-190 phenoxy)-phenoxy] -acetylamino } - benzoic acid
Figure imgf000038_0006
68
3 - [2-(4-B enzyl-phenoxy)- 205-209 acetylamino]-benzoic acid
Figure imgf000038_0007
69 Compound Compound Name Melting Activity Point (°C)
3-[2-(4-Phenoxy-phenoxy)- 202-205 ** acetylamino] -benzoic acid
Figure imgf000039_0001
70
3-[2-(5-Nitro-ρyridin-2-yloxy)- 233-236 acetylamino]-benzoic acid
Figure imgf000039_0002
71
3-{2-[4-(l,3-Dioxo-l,3-dihydro- 238-240 isoindol-2-ylmethyl)-phenoxy] - acetylamino} -benzoic acid
Figure imgf000039_0003
72
3-(2-{4-[4-(l,3-Dioxo-l,3- 95-100 0 dihydro-isoindol-2-yl)- butoxymethyl] -phenoxy } - acetylamino)-benzoic acid
Figure imgf000039_0004
73
3- {2-[4-(4,6-Dimethyl-pyrimidin- 194-196 2-ylsulfanylmethyl)-phenoxy] - acetylamino} -benzoic acid
Figure imgf000039_0005
74
3-[3-(4-Chloro-phenoxy)-2-oxo- 192-193 pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid
Figure imgf000039_0006
75
3-[3-(4-Bromo-phenoxy)-2-oxo- 196-197 pyrrolidin- 1 -yl] -benzoic acid
Figure imgf000039_0007
76
Figure imgf000040_0001
Figure imgf000041_0001
Melting points in Table 1 were obtained on an Electrothermal MeltTemp apparatus and are uncorrected. Activity measurements in Table 1 were performed in a cell- based luciferase reporter assay (as described in Section 4.2) comprising a luciferase reporter construct containing a UGA premature termination codon that was stably fransfected in 293T Human Embryonic Kidney cells. Gentamicin, a small molecule known to allow readthrough of premature termination codons, was used as an internal standard. Activity ^ ._ _ ._ ^ ^ measurements are based on the qualitative relation between the minimum concentration of compound required to produce a given protein in a cell (potency) and the maximum amount of protein produced by the cell (efficacy). Potency and efficacy activities are ranked as either extremely high, very high or significant. The combination of these activities is used to determine the activity ranking. Compounds which were found to have both extremely high potency and extremely high efficacy of protein synthesis are classified as "*****", Compounds which were found to have extremely high potency of protein synthesis and very high efficacy were classified as "****". Compounds which were found to have very high potency of protein synthesis and extremely high efficacy were classified as "****» Compounds which were found to have both very high potency and very high efficacy of protein synthesis are classified as "***". Compounds which were found to have very high potency of protein synthesis and significant efficacy were classified as "**". Compounds which were found to have significant potency of protein synthesis and very high efficacy were classified as "**". Similarly, compounds which were found to have significant potency and efficacy of protein synthesis were classified as "*" (see table below).
Figure imgf000042_0001
Compounds having less than significant potency or efficacy of protein synthesis or both in the cell-based luciferase assay were classified as "0". Nevertheless, these compounds are believed to have utility in the in vivo methods of the invention.
The present invention encompasses the in vitro or in vivo use of a compound of the invention, and the incoφoration of a compoxmd of the invention into pharmaceutical compositions and single unit dosage forms useful in the treatment and prevention of a variety of diseases and disorders. Specific diseases and disorders include those ameliorated by the suppression of a nonsense mutation in messenger RNA.
Pharmaceutical compositions including dosage forms of the invention, which comprise a compound of the invention or a pharmaceutically acceptable polymoφh, „ _ ,_ tiι ^ prodrug, salt, clathrate, solvate or hydrate thereof, can be used in the methods of the invention.
Without being limited by theory, it is believed that a compound of the invention can modulate premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay. Consequently, a first embodiment of the invention relates to a method of modulating premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay comprising contacting a cell exhibiting a nonsense mutation with an effective amount of a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug, metabolite, polymoφh, salt, solvate, hydrate, or clathrate thereof. In a particular embodiment, the invention relates to a method of inducing nonsense suppression comprising contacting a cell exhibiting a nonsense mutation with an effective amount of a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug, metabolite, polymoφh, salt, solvate, hydrate, or clathrate thereof.
4.2 BIOLOGICAL ASSAYS AND ANIMAL STUDIES Compounds that modulate premature translation termination and or nonsense- mediated mRNA decay can be identified by a number of techniques. For example, methods for screening compounds that modulate the post-transcriptional expression of any gene with a premature translation stop codon are described in International Patent Publication No. WO 01/44516 A2, incoφorated herein in its entirety by reference. In a prefened embodiment, a mRNA with a premature termination codon is franslated in vitro and is used to screen a library of test compounds. In a preferred embodiment, the mRNA with a premature termination codon is a reporter gene with a premature termination codon.
Two assays were developed for use in high throughput screens to identify small molecules that promote nonsense suppression. Each assay utilized luciferase because it is a functional reporter gene assay (light is only produced if the protein is functional) and it is extremely sensitive (Light intensity is proportional to luciferase concentration in the nM range). The first assay is a cell-based luciferase reporter assay and the second is a biochemical assay consisting of rabbit reticulocyte lysate and a nonsense-containing luciferase reporter mRNA. In the cell-based assay, a luciferase reporter construct containing a UGA premature termination codon was stably fransfected in 293T Human Embryonic Kidney cells. In the biochemical assay, mRNA containing a UGA premature termination codon was used as a reporter in an in vitro translation reaction using rabbit reticulocyte lysate supplemented with tRNA, hemin, creatine kinase, amino acids, KOAc, Mg(OAc)2, and creatine phosphate. Translation of the mRNA was initiated within a virus ___ ,_ >t
Figure imgf000044_0001
_ derived leader sequence, which significantly reduced the cost of the assay because capped RNA was not required. Synthetic mRNA was prepared in vitro using the T7 promoter and the MegaScript in vitro transcription kit (Ambion). hi both of the biochemical and cell- based assays, addition of gentamicin, a small molecule known to allow readthrough of premature termination codons, resulted in increased luciferase activity and was, therefore, used as an internal standard.
Animal model systems can also be used to demonstrate the safety and efficacy of compounds of formula I, II, HI, IV or V. The compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V can be tested for biological activity using animal models for a disease, condition, or syndrome of interest. These include animals engineered to contain the target RNA element coupled to a functional readout system, such as a transgenic mouse.
Examples of animal models for cystic fibrosis include, but are not limited to, cftr(-/-) mice (see, e.g., Freedman et al, 2001, Gasfroenterology 121(4):950-7), cftr(tmlHGU/tmlHGU) mice (see, e.g., Bernhard et al, 2001, Exp Lung Res 27(4):349- 66), CFTR-deficient mice with defective cAMP-mediated Cl(-) conductance (see, e.g., Stotland et al, 2000, Pediafr Pulmonol 30(5):413-24), and C57BL/6- Cffr(mlUNC)/Cftr(mlUNC) knockout mice (see, e.g., Stotland et al, 2000, Pediafr Pulmonol 30(5):413-24).
Examples of animal models for muscular dystrophy include, but are not limited to, mouse, hamster, cat, dog, and C. elegans. Examples of mouse models for muscular dystrophy include, but are not limited to, the dy-/- mouse (see, e.g., Connolly et al, 2002, J Neuroimmunol 127(l-2):80-7), a muscular dystrophy with myositis (mdm) mouse mutation (see, e.g., Garvey et al, 2002, Genomics 79(2): 146-9), the mdx mouse (see, e.g., Nakamura et al, 2001, Neuromuscul Disord 11(3):251-9), the utrophin-dystrophin knockout (dko) mouse (see, e.g., Nakamura et al, 2001, Nexxromuscul Disord 11(3):251-9), the dy/dy mouse (see, e.g., Dubowitz et al, 2000, Neuromuscul Disord 10(4-5) :292-8), the mdx(Cv3) mouse model (see, e.g., Pillers et al, 1999, Laryngoscope 109(8): 1310-2), and the myotonic ADR-MDX mutant mice (see, e.g., Kramer et al, 1998, Neuromuscul Disord 8(8):542-50). Examples of hamster models for muscular dystrophy include, but are not limited to, sarcoglycan-deficient hamsters (see, e.g., Nakamura et al, 2001, Am J Physiol Cell Physiol 281(2):C690-9) and the BIO 14.6 dystrophic hamster (see, e.g., Schlenker & Burbach, 1991, J Appl Physiol 71(5):1655-62). An example of a feline model for muscular dystrophy includes, but is not limited to, the hypertrophic feline muscular dystrophy model (see, e.g., Gaschen & Burgunder, 2001, Acta Neuropathol (Berl) 101(6):591-600). Canine models for muscular dystrophy include, but are not limited to, golden retriever muscular dystrophy (see, e.g., Fletcher et al, 2001, Neuromuscul Disord ll(3):239-43) and canine X-linked muscular dystrophy (see, e.g., Valentine et al, 1992, Am J Med Genet 42(3):352-6). Examples of C. elegans models for muscular dystrophy are described in Chamberlain & Benian, 2000, Cun Biol 10(21):R795-7 and Culette & Sattelle, 2000, Hum Mol Genet 9(6): 869-77.
Examples of animal models for familial hypercholesterolemia include, but are not limited to, mice lacking functional LDL receptor genes (see, e.g., Aji et al, 1997, Circulation 95(2):430-7), Yoshida rats (see, e.g., Fantappie et al, 1992, Life Sci 50(24):1913-24), the JCR:LA-cp rat (see, e.g., Richardson et al, 1998, Atherosclerosis 138(l):135-46), swine (see, e.g., Hasler-Rapacz et al, 1998, Am J Med Genet 76(5):379- 86), and the Watanabe heritable hyperlipidaemic rabbit (see, e.g., Tsutsumi et al, 2000, Arzneimittelforschung 50(2):118-21; Harsch et al, 1998, Br J Pharmacol 124(2):227-82; and Tanaka et al, 1995, Atherosclerosis 114(l):73-82). An example of an animal model for human cancer in general includes, but is not limited to, spontaneously occurring tumors of companion animals (see, e.g., Nail & MacEwen, 2000, Cancer Invest 18(8):781-92). Examples of animal models for lung cancer include, but are not limited to, lung cancer animal models described by Zhang & Roth (1994, In Vivo 8(5):755-69) and a transgenic mouse model with disrupted p53 function (see, e.g., Morris et al, 1998, J La State Med Soc 150(4): 179-85). An example of an animal model for breast cancer includes, but is not limited to, a transgenic mouse that overexpresses cyclin DI (see, e.g., Hosokawa et al, 2001, Transgenic Res 10(5):471-8). An example of an animal model for colon cancer includes, but is not limited to, a TCRbeta and p53 double knockout mouse (see, e.g., Kado et al, 2001, Cancer Res 61(6):2395-8). Examples of animal models for pancreatic cancer include, but are not limited to, a metastatic model of Panc02 murine pancreatic adenocarcinoma (see, e.g., Wang et al, 2001, Int J Pancreatol 29(l):37-46) and nu-nu mice generated in subcutaneous pancreatic tumours (see, e.g., Ghaneh et al, 2001, Gene Ther 8(3): 199-208). Examples of animal models for non-Hodgkin's lymphoma include, but are not limited to, a severe combined immunodeficiency ("SCID") mouse (see, e.g. , Bryant et al, 2000, Lab Invest 80(4):553-73) and an IgHmu-HOXl 1 transgenic mouse (see, e.g., Hough et al, 1998, Proc Νatl Acad Sci USA 95(23): 13853-8). An example of an animal model for esophageal cancer includes, but is not limited to, a mouse transgenic for the human papillomavirus type 16 E7 oncogene (see, e.g., Herber et al, 1996, J Nirol 70(3): 1873-81). Examples of animal models for colorectal carcinomas include, but are not limited to, Ape mouse models (see, e.g., Fodde & Smits, 2001, Trends Mol Med 7(8):369-73 and Kuraguchi et al, 2000, Oncogene 19(50):5755-63). An example of an animal model for neurofibromatosis includes, but is not limited to, mutant NF1 mice (see, e.g., Cichowski et al, 1996, Semin Cancer Biol 7(5):291- 8). Examples of animal models for retinoblastoma include, but are not limited to, transgenic mice that expression the simian virus 40 T antigen in the retina (see, e.g., Howes et al, 1994, Invest Ophthahnol Vis Sci 35(2):342-51 and Windle et al, 1990, Nature 343(6259):665-9) and inbred rats (see, e.g., Nishida et al, 1981, Curr Eye Res l(l):53-5 and Kobayasbi et al, 1982, Acta Neuropathol (Berl) 57(2-3) :203-8). Examples of animal models for Wilm's tumor include, but are not limited to, a WTl knockout mice (see, e.g., Scharnhorst et al, 1997, Cell Growth Differ 8(2):133-43), a rat subline with a high incidence of neuphroblastoma (see, e.g., Mesfin & Breech, 1996, Lab Anim Sci 46(3):321- 6), and a Wistar/Furth rat with Wilms' tumor (see, e.g., Muφhy et al, 1987, Anticancer Res 7(4B):717-9). Examples of animal models for retinitis pigmentosa include, but are not limited to, the Royal College of Surgeons ("RCS") rat (see, e.g., Nollrath et al, 2001, Proc Νatl Acad Sci USA 98(22);12584-9 and Hanitzsch et al, 1998, Acta Anat (Basel) 162(2-3): 119-26), a rhodopsin knockout mouse (see, e.g., Jaissle et al, 2001, Invest Ophthahnol Vis Sci 42(2):506-13), and Wag/Rij rats (see, e.g., Lai et al, 1980, Am J Pathol 98(l):281-4). Examples of animal models for cirrhosis include, but are not limited to, CC14- exposed rats (see, e.g., Kloehn et al, 2001, Horm Mexab Res 33(7):394-401) and rodent models instigated by bacterial cell components or colitis (see, e.g., Nierling, 2001, Best Pract Res Clin Gastroenterol 15(4):591-610).
Examples of animal models for hemophilia include, but are not limited to, rodent models for hemophilia A (see, e.g. , Reipert et al, 2000, Thromb Haemost 84(5):826-32; Jarvis et al,. 1996, Thromb Haemost 75(2):318-25; and Bi et al, 1995, Nat Genet 10(1):119-21), canine models for hemophilia A (see, e.g., Gallo-Penn et al, 1999, Hum Gene Ther 10(ll):1791-802 and Connelly et al, 1998, Blood 91(9);3273-81), murine models for hemophilia B (see, e.g., Snyder et al, 1999, Nat Med 5(l):64-70; Wang et al, 1997, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 94(21): 11563-6; and Fang et al, 1996, Gene Ther 3(3):217- 22), canine models for hemophilia B (see, e.g., Mount et al, 2002, Blood 99(8):2670-6; Snyder et al, 1999, Nat Med 5(l):64-70; Fang et al, 1996, Gene Ther 3(3):217-22); and Kay et al, 1994, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 91(6):2353-7), and a rhesus macaque model for hemophilia B (see, e.g., Lozier et al, 1999, Blood 93(6): 1875-81). μ _ _ _ ___
Examples of animal models for von Willebrand disease include, but are not limited to, an inbred mouse strain RHIS/J (see, e.g., Nichols et al, 1994, 83(11):3225-31 and Sweeney et al, 1990, 76(11):2258-65), rats injected with botrocetin (see, e.g., Sanders et al, 1988, Lab Invest 59(4):443-52), and porcine models for von Willebrand disease (see, e.g., Nichols et al, 1995, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 92(7):2455-9; Johnson & Bowie, 1992, J Lab Clin Med 120(4):553-8); and Brinkhous et al, 1991, Mayo Clin Proc 66(7):733-42).
Examples of animal models for b-thalassemia include, but are not limited to, murine models with mutations in globin genes (see, e.g., Lewis et al, 1998, Blood 91(6):2152-6; Raja et al, 1994, Br J Haematol 86(1): 156-62; Popp et al, 1985, 445:432-44; and Skow et al, 1983, Cell 34(3): 1043-52).
Examples of animal models for kidney stones include, but are not limited to, genetic hypercalciuric rats (see, e.g., Bushinsky et al, 1999, Kidney hit 55(l):234-43 and Bushinsky et al, 1995, Kidney hit 48(6): 1705-13), chemically treated rats (see, e.g., Grases et al, 1998, Scand J Urol Nephrol 32(4):261-5; Burgess et al, 1995, Urol Res 23(4):239- 42; Kumar et al, 1991, J Urol 146(5):1384-9; Okada et al, 1985, Hinyokika Kiyo
31(4):565-77; and Bluestone et al, 1975, Lab Invest 33(3):273-9), hyperoxaluric rats (see, e.g., Jones et al, 1991, J Urol 145(4):868-74), pigs with unilateral retrograde flexible nephroscopy (see, e.g., Seifmah et al, 2001, 57(4):832-6), and rabbits with an obstructed upper urinary tract (see, e.g., Itatani et al, 1979, Invest Urol 17(3):234-40). Examples of animal models for ataxia-telangiectasia include, but are not limited to, murine models of ataxia-telangiectasia (see, e.g., Barlow et al, 1999, Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 96(17):9915-9 and Inoue et al, 1986, Cancer Res 46(8):3979-82).
Examples of animal models for lysosomal storage diseases include, but are not limited to, mouse models for mucopolysaccharidosis type Nil (see, e.g., Brooks et al, 2002, Proc Νatl Acad Sci U S A. 99(9):6216-21 ; Monroy et al, 2002, Bone 30(2):352-9; Nogler et al, 2001, Pediafr Dev Pathol. 4(5):421-33; Nogler et al, 2001, Pediafr Res. 49(3):342-8; and Wolfe et al., 2000, Mol Ther. 2(6):552-6), a mouse model for metachromatic leukodystrophy (see, e.g., Matzner et al, 2002, Gene Ther. 9(l):53-63), a mouse model of Sandhoff disease (see, e.g., Sango et al, 2002, Νeuropathol Appl Νeurobiol. 28(l):23-34), mouse models for mucopolysaccharidosis type III A (see, e.g., Bhattacharyya et al., 2001, Glycobiology 11(1):99-10 and Bhaumik et al., 1999, Glycobiology 9(12): 1389-96.), arylsulfatase A (ASA)-deficient mice (see, e.g., D'Hooge et al, 1999, Brain Res. 847(2):352-6 and D'Hooge et al, 1999, Νeurosci Lett. 273(2):93-6); mice with an aspartylglucosaminuria mutation (see, e.g., Jalanko et al, 1998, Hum Mol Genet. 7(2):265- 72); feline models of mucopolysaccharidosis type VI (see, e.g-., Crawley et al, 1998, J Clin Invest. 101(1):109-19 and Norrdin et al., 1995, Bone 17(5):485-9); a feline model of Niemann-Pick disease type C (see, e.g., March et al, 1997, Acta Neuropathol (Berl ). 94(2): 164-72); acid sphingomyelinase-deficient mice (see, e.g., Otterbach & Stoffel, 1995, Cell 81(7):1053-6), and bovine mannosidosis (see, e.g., Jolly et al, 1975, Birth Defects Orig Arctic Ser. ll(6):273-8).
Examples of animal models for tuberous sclerosis ("TSC") include, but are not limited to, a mouse model of TSC 1 (see, e.g., Kwiatkowski et al, 2002, Hum Mol Genet. 11(5):525-34), a Tscl (TSC1 homologue) knockout mouse (see, e.g., Kobayashi et al., 2001, Proc Natl Acad Sci U S A. 2001 Jul 17;98(15):8762-7), a TSC2 gene mutant(Eker) rat model (see, e.g., Hino 2000, Nippon Rinsho 58(6):1255-61; Mizuguchi et al, 2000, J Neuropathol Exp Neurol. 59(3):188-9; and Hino et al, 1999, Prog Exp Tumor Res. 35:95- 108); and Tsc2(+/-) mice (see, e.g., Onda et al, 1999, J Clin Invest. 104(6):687-95).
4.3 SYNTHESIS AND PREPARATION The compounds of the invention can be obtained via standard, well-known synthetic methodology, see e.g. March, J. Advanced Organic Chemistry; Reactions Mechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., 1992. Some convenient methods are illustrated in Schemes 1 and 2. Starting materials useful for preparing the compounds of the invention and intermediates therefor, are commercially available or can be prepared from commercially available materials using known synthetic methods and reagents.
Compounds of Formulas I- VI can be synthesized using the synthesis depicted in schemes A-D below. The compounds of the present invention may be prepared by the methods discussed in the following section.
Compounds of formula I may be prepared using the methodology depicted in Scheme A. A compound of structure Al is coupled to an alcohol (or thiol) reagent A2. For compound Al, the group L represents a leaving group of some sort, and can include (but is not limited to) halide, alkylsulfonate, arylsulfonate, diazonium, etc. Typical alkylation conditions for the coulpling of Al and A2 might include the presence of a basic reagent as a catalyst. Basic reagents that are useful here include trialkylamines, sodium or potassium carbonate, sodium hydride, etc. A variety of solvents can be used to promote the reaction, including acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, acetone, 2-butanone and 1,4-dioxane. L can also include hydroxy, which can be activated in-situ using conditions such as those employed in the Mitsonobu reaction (typically, use of a trisubstituted phosphine reagent in conjunction with an azodicarboxylate compound). An alternative method involves the coupling of aniline compoxmd 3 with the reagent 4. In this case, the group L' includes halides, but may also represent the anhydride (i.e., L' = Z(CH2)nXCH2C(=Y)O). L' may also be OH, and the reaction is then a peptide-type coupling which is familiar to those skilled in the art. Such reactions are mediated by in-situ activation with reagents such as dialkylcarbodiimide, carbonyldiimidazole or isobutylchloroformate.
Scheme A
Figure imgf000049_0001
A3
Modifications of the carboxyl group (i.e., R6) may be performed at any time in the synthesis which proves compatible with the substrate and chemistry. For example, if R6 is not H, the ester can be cleaved to the free carbox ylate using a number of standard methods. This includes (but is not limited to) sodium or potassium hydroxide, lithium iodide, boron tribromide, fluoride reagents (for certain silicon-bearing R6 groups) and catalytic hydrogenation (for certain benzyl-type R6 groups). The compound may also be attached through the carboxylate group to a solid-phase resin, which facilitates the synthesis by allowing easy removal of impurities and byproducts from each reaction by simple filtration and washing with an appropriate solvent. Cleavage of the product from the resin may then be accomplished in various ways to afford the final
Methods of preparing compounds Al and A4 are shown in Scheme B. These are analogous to the coupling of A3 and A4, replacing reagent A4 with compound Bl. Here, as before, L is a suitable leaving group to effect the coupling reaction. The reaction of compounds B2 and A2 is performed analogously to that of compounds Al and A2. The resulting product, B3, is then converted to compound A4 by transforming the group OR to L', which is capable of undergoing the reaction shown in Scheme A. Scheme B
Figure imgf000050_0001
A3
Figure imgf000050_0002
Methods to transform the amide functionality in compounds of Formula I are shown in Scheme C. A compound of formula CI is prepared using methods described above. The carbonyl bond may then be thiolated using an appropriate thiolating reagent, such as Lawesson's reagent or phosphorus pentasulfide, typically in inert solvents at elevated temperature. The amide nifrogen atom of the unsubstituted compound C2 may be alkylated using an alkylating agent C3 (wherein L" is a leaving group such as halide or alkyl or arylsulfonate) basic reagent such as sodium hydride or potassium hexamethyldisilazane in polar aprotic solvents at temperatures ranging from sub-ambient to heated.
Scheme C
Figure imgf000050_0003
In the cases where the reagent of structure A3 is not directly available, chemistry such as that depicted in Scheme D may be employed to generate A3. In some cases, it may prove convenient to nitrate a benzoate compound of structure DI. Nitration conditions typically include concentrated nitric acid or sodium nitrite optionally in the presence of a ,_ u . .,,,,,, ,„, ] ιι sulfuric acid. The nitro group of compound D2 may be reduced to an aniline, using conditions such as catalytic hydrogenation or the use of reducing agents such as tin (II) dichloride, iron powder or sodium hydrosulfite. The aniline compound may then be functionahzed as desired (if Rl is not H) to afford compound A3. Alkylation reactions may be used, employing appropriate alkylating reagents such as alkyl halides, etc. and bases. Anilines may also be functionahzed by reductive alkylations, whereby an intermediate Schiff base compound (formed by condensation of the aniline with an aldehyde or ketone reagent) is reduced in situ (typically by catalytic hydrogenation or reagents such as sodium cyanoborohydride). An alternative route involves the reaction of the lithium reagent D3 with an carboxylating reagent to give the compound A3. The nitrogen atom in compound D3 must usually be protected with group P, which can include pivaloyl or tert- butoxycarbonyl. The 3-lithio reagent may be generated by direct deprotonation for some substrates using strong bases such as sec- or tert-butyllithium at temperatures typically ranging slightly below to at ambient. The lithium reagent may also be generated by lithium- halogen exchange from the bromo or iodo analogue and an alkyllithium reagent, usually at reduced temperatures. Carboxylating reagents that are useful here include solid carbon dioxide or an alkyl chloroformate. After the carboxylation, the protecting group P may be removed by methods specific to the group employed, well-known in the area of protecting group chemistry.
Scheme D
Figure imgf000051_0001
D1 D2 A3
4.4 METHODS OF USE
The invention encompasses methods of treating and preventing diseases or disorders ameliorated by the suppression of premature translation termination and/or nonsense- mediated mRNA decay in a patient which comprise administering to a patient in need of such treatment or prevention a therapeutically effective amount of a compoxmd of the
Figure imgf000052_0001
invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug, solvate, metabolite, polymoφh, salt, solvate, hydrate, or clathrate thereof.
In one embodiment, the present invention encompasses the treatment or prevention of any disease which is associated with a gene exhibiting premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay. In one embodiment, the disease is due, in part, to the lack of expression of the gene resulting from a premature stop codon. Specific examples of genes which may exhibit premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay and diseases associated with premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay are found in U.S. Patent Application No. 60/390,747, titled: Methods For Identifying Small Molecules That Modulate Premature Translation Termination And Nonsense Mediated mRNA Decay, filed June 21, 2002, which is incoφorated herein by reference in its entirety.
Diseases ameliorated by the suppression of premature translation termination and or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay include, but are not limited to: a genetic disease, cancer, an autoimmune disease, a blood disease, a collagen disease, diabetes, a neurodegenerative disease, a proliferative disease, a cardiovascular disease, a pulmonary disease, an inflammatory disease or central nervous system disease.
Specific genetic diseases within the scope of the methods of the invention include, but are not limited to, amyloidosis, hemophilia, Alzheimer's disease, Tay Sachs disease, atherosclerosis, giantism, dwarfism, hypothyroidism, hyperthyroidism, aging, obesity, Parkinson's disease, Niemann Pick's disease, cystic fibrosis, muscular dystrophy, heart disease, kidney stones, ataxia-telangiectasia, familial hypercholesterolemia, retinitis pigmentosa, lysosomal storage disease, tuberous sclerosis, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, and Marfan syndrome. Both solid tumor and other cancers are included within the methods of the invention.
In another embodiment, the genetic disease is an autoimmune disease. In a preferred embodiment, the autoimmune disease is rheumatoid arthritis or graft versus host disease.
In another embodiment, the genetic disease is a blood disease. In a preferred embodiment, the blood disease is hemophilia, Von Willebrand disease, ataxia- telangiectasia, b-thalassemia or kidney stones.
In another embodiment, the genetic disease is a collagen disease. In a embodiment, the collagen disease is osteogenesis imperfecta or cirrhosis. hi another embodiment, the genetic disease is diabetes. ^ ^ „ „ . h another embodiment, the genetic disease is an inflammatory disease. In a preferred embodiment, the inflammatory disease is arthritis.
In another embodiment, the genetic disease is a central nervous system disease. In one embodiment the central nervous system disease is a neurodegenerative disease. In a preferred embodiment, the central nervous system disease is multiple sclerosis, muscular dystrophy, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, Alzheimer's disease, Tay Sachs disease, late infantile neuronal ceroid lipofuscinosis (LINCL) or Parkinson's disease.
In another embodiment, the genetic disease is cancer. In a prefened embodiment, the cancer is of the head and neck, eye, skin, mouth, throat, esophagus, chest, bone, lung, colon, sigmoid, rectum, stomach, prostate, breast, ovaries, kidney, liver, pancreas, brain, intestine, heart or adrenals.
In another preferred embodiment, the cancer is associated with the p53 gene. Nonsense mutations have been identified in the p53 gene and have been implicated in cancer. Several nonsense mutations in the p53 gene have been identified (see, e.g., Masuda et al, 2000, Tokai J Exp Clin Med. 25(2):69-77; Oh et al, 2000, Mol Cells 10(3):275-80; Li et al, 2000, Lab Invest. 80(4):493-9; Yang et al, 1999, Zhonghua Zhong Liu Za Zhi 21(2):114-8; Finkelstein et al, 1998, Mol Diagn. 3(1):37-41; Kajiyama et al, 1998, Dis Esophagus. 11(4):279-83; Kawamura et al, 1999, Leuk Res. 23(2):115-26; Radig et al, 1998, Hum Paxhol. 29(ll):1310-6; Schuyer et al, 1998, hit J Cancer 76(3):299-303; Wang- Gohrke et al. , 1998, Oncol Rep. 5(l):65-8; Fulop et al, 1998, J Reprod Med. 43(2): 119-27; Ninomiya et al, 1997, J Dermatol Sci. 14(3):173-8; Hsieh et al, 1996, Cancer Lett. 100(1- 2):107-13; Rail et al, 1996, Pancreas. 12(l):10-7; Fukutomi et al, 1995, Nippon Rinsho. 53(ll):2764-8; Frebourg et al., 1995, Am J Hum Genet. 56(3):608-15; Dove et al, 1995, Cancer Surv. 25:335-55; Adamson et al, 1995, Br J Haematol. 89(l):61-6; Grayson et al., 1994, Am J Pediafr Hematol Oncol. 16(4):341-7; Lepelley et al, 1994, Leukemia. 8(8):1342-9; Mchityre et al, 1994, J Clin Oncol. 12(5):925-30; Horio et al, 1994, Oncogene. 9(4):1231-5; Nakamura et al, 1992, Jpn J Cancer Res. 83(12):1293-8; Davidoff et al., 1992, Oncogene. 7(l):127-33; and Ishioka et al, 1991, Biochem Biophys Res Commun. 177(3): 901-6; the disclosures of which are hereby incoφorated by reference in their entireties). Any disease associated with a p53 gene encoding a premature translation codon including, but not limited to, the nonsense mutations described in the references cited above, can be treated or prevented by compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V without being limited by theory these compounds mediate premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay. „ _ _ ... _
In other embodiments, diseases to be treated or prevented by administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I include solid tumor, sarcoma, carcinomas, fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, colon carcinoma, pancreatic cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duct carcinoma, choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilms' tumor, cervical cancer, testicular tumor, lung carcinoma, small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, epithelial carcinoma, glioma, astrocytoma, medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, Kaposi's sarcoma, pinealoma, hemangioblastoma, acoustic neuroma, oligodendroglioma, menangioma, melanoma, neuroblastoma, retinoblastoma, a blood-born tumor, acute lymphoblastic leukemia, acute lymphoblastic B-cell leukemia, acute lymphoblastic T-cell leukemia, acute myeloblastic leukemia, acute promyelocytic leukemia, acute monoblastic leukemia, acute erythroleukemic leukemia, acute megakaryoblastic leukemia, acute myelomonocytic leukemia, acute nonlymphocyctic leukemia, acute undifferentiated leukemia, chronic myelocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, hairy cell leukemia, or multiple myeloma. See e.g., Harrison 's Principles of Internal Medicine, Eugene Braunwald et al, eds., pp. 491-762 (15th ed. 2001).
In a preferred embodiment, the invention encompasses a method of treating or preventing a disease ameliorated by modulation of premature translation termination and or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay, or ameliorating one or more symptoms associated therewith comprising contacting a cell with an effective amount of a compound of formula I, II, III, IV or V. Cells encompassed by the present methods include animal cells, mammalian cells, bacterial cells, plant cells and virally infected cells. In one embodiment, the nonsense codon was present in the progenitor DNA. In another embodiment, the nonsense codon resulted from mutagenesis.
In certain embodiments, a compound of formula I, II, III, IV or V, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, is administered to a patient, preferably a mammal, more preferably a human, as a preventative measure against a disease associated with premature translation termination and or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay. _ _ _
In a preferred embodiment, it is first determined that the patient is suffering from a disease associate with premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay. In another embodiment, the patient has undergone a screening process to determine the presence of a nonsense mutation comprising the steps of screening a subject, or cells extracted therefrom, by an acceptable nonsense mutation screening assay. In a preferred embodiment, the DNA of the patient can be sequenced or subject to Southern Blot, polymerase chain reaction (PCR), use of the Short Tandem Repeat (STR), or polymoφhic length restriction fragments (RFLP) analysis to determine if a nonsense mutation is present in the DNA of the patient. Alternatively, it can be determined if altered levels of the protein with the nonsense mutation are expressed in the patient by western blot or other immunoassays. hi another embodiment, the patient is an unborn child who has undergone screening in utero for the presence of a nonsense mutation. Administration of a compound of formula I, II, III, IV or V can occur either before or after birth. In a related embodiment, the therapy is personalized in that the patient is screened for a nonsense mutation screening assay and treated by the administration of one or more compounds of the invention; particularly, the patient may be treated with a compoxmd particularly suited for the mutations in question; e.g., depending upon the disease type, cell type, and the gene in question. Such methods are well known to one of skill in the art.
In another embodiment, the cells (e.g., animal cells, mammalian cells, bacterial cells, plant cells and virally infected cells) are screened for premature translation termination and/or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay with a method such as that described above (i.e., the DNA of the cell can be sequenced or subjected to Southern Blot, polymerase chain reaction (PCR), use of the Short Tandem Repeat (STR), or polymoφhic length restriction fragments (RFLP) analysis to determine if a nonsense mutation is present in the DNA of the cell).
Specific methods of the invention further comprise the administration of an additional therapeutic agent (i.e. a therapeutic agent other than a compound of the invention). In certain embodiments of the present invention, the compounds of the invention can be used in combination with at least one other therapeutic agent. Therapeutic agents include, but are not limited to non-opioid analgesics; non-steroid anti-inflammatory agents; antiemetics; β-adrenergic blockers; anticonvulsants; antidepressants; Ca2+-channel blockers; anticancer agent and mixtures thereof.
In certain embodiments, the compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V can be administered or formulated in combination with anticancer agents. Suitable anticancer agents include, but are not limited to, alkylating agents; nitrogen mustards; folate antagonists; purine antagonists; pyrimidine antagonists; spindle poisons; topoisomerase inhibitors; apoptosis inducing agents; angiogenesis inhibitors; podophyllotoxins; nitrosoureas; cisplatin; carboplatin; interferon; asparginase; tamoxifen; leuprolide; flutamide; megestrol; mitomycin; bleomycin; doxorubicin; irinotecan and taxol. hi certain embodiments, the compounds of formula I, II, III, IV or V can be administered or formulated in combination with antibiotics, hi certain embodiments, the antibiotic is a macrolide (e.g., tobramycin (Tobi®)), a cephalosporin (e.g., cephalexin (Keflex®), cephradine (Nelosef®), cefixroxime (Ceftin®), cefprozil (Cefzil®), cefaclor (Ceclor®), cefixime (Suprax®) or cefadroxil (Duricef®)), a clarithromycin (e.g., clarithromycin (Biaxin®)), an erythromycin (e.g., erythromycin (EMycin®)), a penicillin (e.g., penicillin N (N-Cillin K® or Pen Nee K®)) or a quinolone (e.g., ofloxacin (Floxin®), ciprofloxacin (Cipro®) or norfloxacin (Νoroxin®)). In a preferred embodiment, the antibiotic is active against Pseudomonas aeruginosa. The compounds of the invention and the other therapeutics agent can act additively or, more preferably, synergistically. In a preferced embodiment, a composition comprising a compound of the invention is administered concurrently with the adminisfration of another therapeutic agent, which can be part of the same composition or in a different composition from that comprising the compounds of the invention. In another embodiment, a compound of the invention is administered prior to or subsequent to administration of another therapeutic agent.
The magnitude of a prophylactic or therapeutic dose of a particular active ingredient of the invention in the acute or chronic management of a disease or condition will vary, however, with the nature and severity of the disease or condition, and the route by which the active ingredient is administered. The dose, and perhaps the dose frequency, will also vary according to the age, body weight, and response of the individual patient. Suitable dosing regimens can be readily selected by those skilled in the art with due consideration of such factors. In general, the recommended daily dose range for the conditions described herein lie within the range of from about 0.1 mg to about 2000 mg per day, given as a single once- a-day dose, preferably as divided doses throughout a day. In one embodiment, the daily dose is administered in a single dose or in equally divided doses. Specifically, a daily dose range should be from about 5 mg to about 500 mg per day, more specifically, between about 10 mg and about 200 mg per day. In managing the patient, the therapy should be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps about 1 mg to about 25 mg, and increased if necessary up to about ^ _ _ ^ ^
200 mg to about 2000 mg per day as either a single dose or divided doses, depending on the patient's global response.
It may be necessary to use dosages of the active ingredient outside the ranges disclosed herein in some cases, as will be apparent to those of ordinary skill in the art. Furthermore, it is noted that the clinician or treating physician will know how and when to interrupt, adjust, or terminate therapy in conjunction with individual patient response.
The phrases "therapeutically effective amount", "prophylactically effective amount" and "therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount," as used herein encompass the above described dosage amounts and dose frequency schedules. Different therapeutically effective amounts may be applicable for different diseases and conditions, as will be readily known by those of ordinary skill in the art. Similarly, amounts sufficient to treat or prevent such diseases, but insufficient to cause, or sufficient to reduce, adverse effects associated with conventional therapies are also encompassed by the above described dosage amounts and dose frequency schedules. 4.5 PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
Pharmaceutical compositions and single unit dosage forms comprising a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable polymoφh, prodrug, salt, solvate, hydrate, or clathrate thereof, are also encompassed by the invention. Individual dosage forms of the invention may be suitable for oral, mucosal (including sublingual, buccal, rectal, nasal, or vaginal), parenteral (including subcutaneous, intramuscular, bolus injection, mfraarterial, or intravenous), transdermal, or topical administration.
Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention comprise a compoxmd of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug, polymoφh, salt, solvate, hydrate, or clathrate thereof. Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention typically also comprise one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients. A particular pharmaceutical composition encompassed by this embodiment comprises a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable polymoφh, prodrug, salt, solvate, hydrate, or clathrate thereof, and at least one additional therapeutic agent. Examples of additional therapeutic agents include, but are not limited to: anti-cancer drugs and anti-inflammation therapies including, but not limited to, those listed above in Section 4.3.
Single unit dosage forms of the invention are suitable for oral, mucosal (e.g., nasal, sublingual, vaginal, buccal, or rectal), parenteral (e.g., subcutaneous, intravenous, bolus injection, intramuscular, or intraarterial), or transdermal adminisfration to a patient. ,...,, „. ,, ,„„ „... ..,, ..„.„
Examples of dosage forms include, but are not limited to: tablets; caplets; capsules, such as soft elastic gelatin capsules; cachets; troches; lozenges; dispersions; suppositories; ointments; cataplasms (poultices); pastes; powders; dressings; creams; plasters; solutions; patches; aerosols (e.g., nasal sprays or inhalers); gels; liquid dosage forms suitable for oral or mucosal adminisfration to a patient, including suspensions (e.g., aqueous or non-aqueous liquid suspensions, oil-in- water emulsions, or a water-in-oil liquid emulsions), solutions, and elixirs; liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral administration to a patient; and sterile solids (e.g., crystalline or amoφhous solids) that can be reconstituted to provide liquid dosage forms suitable for parenteral administration to a patient. The composition, shape, and type of dosage forms of the invention will typically vary depending on their use. For example, a dosage form used in the acute treatment of inflammation or a related disease may contain larger amounts of one or more of the active ingredients it comprises than a dosage form used in the chronic treatment of the same disease. Similarly, a parenteral dosage form may contain smaller amounts of one or more of the active ingredients it comprises than an oral dosage form used to treat the same disease or disorder. These and other ways in which specific dosage forms encompassed by this invention will vary from one another will be readily apparent to those skilled in the art. See, e.g., Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990). Typical pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprise one or more carriers, excipients or diluents. Suitable excipients are well known to those skilled in the art of pharmacy, and non-limiting examples of suitable excipients are provided herein. Whether a particular excipient is suitable for incoφoration into a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form depends on a variety of factors well known in the art including, but not limited to, the way in which the dosage form will be administered to a patient. For example, oral dosage forms such as tablets may contain excipients not suited for use in parenteral dosage forms. The suitability of a particular excipient may also depend on the specific active ingredients in the dosage form.
This invention further encompasses anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms comprising active ingredients, since water can facilitate the degradation of some compounds. For example, the addition of water (e.g., 5%) is widely accepted in the pharmaceutical arts as a means of simulating long-term storage in order to determine characteristics such as shelf-life or the stability of formulations over time. See, e.g., Jens T. Carstensen, Drug Stability: Principles & Practice, 2d. Ed., Marcel Dekker, NY, NY, 1995, pp. 379-80. In effect, water and heat accelerate the decomposition of some compounds. Thus, the effect of water on a formulation can be of great significance since moisture and/or humidity are commonly encountered during manufacture, handling, packaging, storage, shipment, and use of formulations.
Anhydrous pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention can be prepared using anhydrous or low moisture containing ingredients and low moisture or low humidity conditions. Pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that comprise lactose and at least one active ingredient that comprises a primary or secondary amine are preferably anhydrous if substantial contact with moisture and/or humidity during manufacturing, packaging, and/or storage is expected. An anhydrous pharmaceutical composition should be prepared and stored such that its anhydrous nature is maintained. Accordingly, anhydrous compositions are preferably packaged using materials known to prevent exposure to water such that they can be included in suitable formulary kits. Examples of suitable packaging include, but are not limited to, hermetically sealed foils, plastics, unit dose containers (e.g., vials), blister packs, and strip packs.
The invention further encompasses pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms that comprise one or more compounds that reduce the rate by which an active ingredient will decompose. Such compounds, which are referred to herein as "stabilizers," include, but are not limited to, antioxidants such as ascorbic acid, pH buffers, or salt buffers. Like the amounts and types of excipients, the amounts and specific types of active ingredients in a dosage form may differ depending on factors such as, but not limited to, the route by which it is to be administered to patients. However, typical dosage forms of the invention comprise a compound of the invention, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, hydrate, polymoprh or prodrug thereof lie within the range of from about 0.1 mg to about 2000 mg per day, given as a single once-a-day dose in the morning but preferably as divided doses throughout the day taken with food. More specifically, the daily dose is administered twice daily in equally divided doses. Specifically, a daily dose range should be from about 5 mg to about 500 mg per day, more specifically, between about 10 mg and about 200 mg per day. In managing the patient, the therapy should be initiated at a lower dose, perhaps about 1 mg to about 25 mg, and increased if necessary up to about 200 mg to about 2000 mg per day as either a single dose or divided doses, depending on the patient's global response. u ^ ^ _,
4.5.1 ORAL DOSAGE FORMS
Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention that are suitable for oral admimstration can be presented as discrete dosage forms, such as, but are not limited to, tablets (e.g., chewable tablets), caplets, capsules, and liquids (e.g., flavored syrups). Such dosage forms contain predetermined amounts of active ingredients, and may be prepared by methods of pharmacy well known to those skilled in the art. See generally, Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990).
Typical oral dosage forms of the invention are prepared by combining the active ingredient(s) in an intimate admixture with at least one excipient according to conventional pharmaceutical compounding techniques. Excipients can take a wide variety of forms depending on the form of preparation desired for admimstration. For example, excipients suitable for use in oral liquid or aerosol dosage forms include, but are not limited to, water, glycols, oils, alcohols, flavoring agents, preservatives, and coloring agents. Examples of excipients suitable for use in solid oral dosage forms (e.g., powders, tablets, capsules, and caplets) include, but are not limited to, starches, sugars, micro-crystalline cellulose, diluents, granulating agents, lubricants, binders, and disintegrating agents.
Because of their ease of administration, tablets and capsules represent the most advantageous oral dosage unit forms, in which case solid excipients are employed. If desired, tablets can be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques. Such dosage forms can be prepared by any of the methods of pharmacy. In general, pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms are prepared by uniformly and intimately admixing the active ingredients with liquid carriers, finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then shaping the product into the desired presentation if necessary.
For example, a tablet can be prepared by compression or molding. Compressed tablets can be prepared by compressing in a suitable machine the active ingredients in a free-flowing form such as powder or granules, optionally mixed with an excipient. Molded tablets can be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.
Examples of excipients that can be used in oral dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, binders, fillers, disintegrants, and lubricants. Binders suitable for use in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms include, but are not limited to, corn starch, potato starch, or other starches, gelatin, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, sodium alginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacanth, guar gum, cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl u _ _ ..„. cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), polyvinyl pyrrolidone, methyl cellulose, pre-gelatinized starch, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, (e.g., Nos. 2208, 2906, 2910), microcrystalline cellulose, and mixtures thereof.
Examples of fillers suitable for use in the pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms disclosed herein include, but are not limited to, talc, calcium carbonate (e.g., granules or powder), microcrystalline cellulose, powdered cellulose, dextrates, kaolin, mannitol, silicic acid, sorbitol, starch, pre-gelatinized starch, and mixtures thereof. The binder or filler in pharmaceutical compositions of the invention is typically present in from about 50 to about 99 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form. Suitable forms of microcrystalline cellulose include, but are not limited to, the materials sold as AVICEL-PH-101, AVICEL-PH-103 AVICEL RC-581, AVICEL-PH-105 (available from FMC Coφoration, American Viscose Division, Avicel Sales, Marcus Hook, PA), and mixtures thereof. An specific binder is a mixture of microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose sold as AVICEL RC-581. Suitable anhydrous or low moisture excipients or additives include AVICEL-PH-103™ and Starch 1500 LM.
Disintegrants are used in the compositions of the invention to provide tablets that disintegrate when exposed to an aqueous environment. Tablets that contain too much disintegrant may disintegrate in storage, while those that contain too little may not disintegrate at a desired rate or under the desired conditions. Thus, a sufficient amount of disintegrant that is neither too much nor too little to detrimentally alter the release of the active ingredients should be used to form solid oral dosage forms of the invention. The amount of disintegrant used varies based upon the type of formulation, and is readily discernible to those of ordinary skill in the art. Typical pharmaceutical compositions comprise from about 0.5 to about 15 weight percent of disintegrant, specifically from about 1 to about 5 weight percent of disintegrant.
Disintegrants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, agar-agar, alginic acid, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, polacrilin potassium, sodium starch glycolate, potato or tapioca starch, pre-gelatinized starch, other starches, clays, other algins, other celluloses, gums, and mixtures thereof.
Lubricants that can be used in pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc, hydrogenated vegetable oil (e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil, and soybean oil), zinc stearate, ethyl oleate, ethyl laureate, agar, and mixtures thereof. Additional lubricants include, for example, a syloid silica gel (AEROSIL 200, manufactured by W.R. Grace Co. of Baltimore, MD), a coagulated aerosol of synthetic silica (marketed by Degussa Co. of Piano, TX), CAB-O-SIL (a pyrogenic silicon dioxide product sold by Cabot Co. of Boston, MA), and mixtures thereof. If used at all, lubricants are typically used in an amount of less than about 1 weight percent of the pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms into which they are incoφorated.
4.5.2 DELAYED RELEASE DOSAGE FORMS Active ingredients of the invention can be administered by controlled release means or by delivery devices that are well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to, those described in U.S. Patent Nos.: 3,845,770; 3,916,899; 3,536,809; 3,598,123; and 4,008,719, 5,674,533, 5,059,595, 5,591,767, 5,120,548, 5,073,543, 5,639,476, 5,354,556, and 5,733,566, each of which is incoφorated herein by reference. Such dosage forms can be used to provide slow or controlled-release of one or more active ingredients using, for example, hydropropylmethyl cellulose, other polymer matrices, gels, permeable membranes, osmotic systems, multilayer coatings, microparticles, liposomes, microspheres, or a combination thereof to provide the desired release profile in varying proportions. Suitable controlled-release formulations known to those of ordinary skill in the art, including those described herein, can be readily selected for use with the active ingredients of the invention. The invention thus encompasses single unit dosage forms suitable for oral administration such as, but not limited to, tablets, capsules, gelcaps, and caplets that are adapted for controlled-release.
All controlled-release pharmaceutical products have a common goal of improving drug therapy over that achieved by their non-controlled counteφarts. Ideally, the use of an optimally designed controlled-release preparation in medical treatment is characterized by a minimum of drug substance being employed to cure or control the condition in a minimum amount of time. Advantages of confrolled-release formulations include extended activity of the drug, reduced dosage frequency, and increased patient compliance. In addition, controlled-release formulations can be used to affect the time of onset of action or other characteristics, such as blood levels of the drug, and can thus affect the occurrence of side (e.g., adverse) effects.
Most controlled-release formulations are designed to initially release an amount of drug (active ingredient) that promptly produces the desired therapeutic effect, and gradually . _ and continually release of other amounts of drug to maintain this level of therapeutic or prophylactic effect over an extended period of time. In order to maintain this constant level of drug in the body, the drug must be released from the dosage form at a rate that will replace the amount of drug being metabolized and excreted from the body. Controlled- release of an active ingredient can be stimulated by various conditions including, but not limited to, pH, temperature, enzymes, water, or other physiological conditions or compounds.
4.5.3 PARENTERAL DOSAGE FORMS
Parenteral dosage forms can be administered to patients by various routes including, but not limited to, subcutaneous, intravenous (including bolus injection), intramuscular, and intraarterial. Because their administration typically bypasses patients' natural defenses against contaminants, parenteral dosage forms are preferably sterile or capable of being sterilized prior to administration to a patient. Examples of parenteral dosage forms include, but are not limited to, solutions ready for injection, dry products ready to be dissolved or suspended in a pharmaceutically acceptable vehicle for injection, suspensions ready for injection, and emulsions.
Suitable vehicles that can be used to provide parenteral dosage forms of the invention are well known to those skilled in the art. Examples include, but are not limited to: Water for Injection USP; aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, Sodium Chloride Injection, Ringer's Injection, Dextrose Injection, Dextrose and Sodium Chloride Injection, and Lactated Ringer's Injection; water-miscible vehicles such as, but not limited to, ethyl alcohol, polyethylene glycol, and polypropylene glycol; and non-aqueous vehicles such as, but not limited to, corn oil, cottonseed oil, peanut oil, sesame oil, ethyl oleate, isopropyl myristate, and benzyl benzoate. Compounds that increase the solubility of one or more of the active ingredients disclosed herein can also be incoφorated into the parenteral dosage forms of the invention.
4.5.4 TRANSDERMAL AND TOPICAL DOSAGE FORMS
Transdermal and topical dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, creams, lotions, ointments, gels, solutions, emulsions, suspensions, or other forms known to one of skill in the art. See, e.g., Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds.,
Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990); and Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms,
4th ed., Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia (1985). Transdermal dosage forms include "reservoir type" or "matrix type" patches, which can be applied to the skin and worn for a specific period of time to permit the penetration of a desired amount of active ingredients.
Figure imgf000064_0001
Suitable excipients (e.g., carriers and diluents) and other materials that can be used to provide transdermal and topical dosage forms encompassed by this invention are well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts, and depend on the particular tissue to which a given pharmaceutical composition or dosage form will be applied. With that fact in mind, typical excipients include, but are not limited to, water, acetone, ethanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butane- 1,3-diol, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, mineral oil, and mixtures thereof to form lotions, tinctures, creams, emulsions, gels or ointments, which are non-toxic and pharmaceutically acceptable. Moisturizers or humectants can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions and dosage forms if desired. Examples of such additional ingredients are well known in the art. See, e.g., Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990).
Depending on the specific tissue to be treated, additional components may be used prior to, in conjunction with, or subsequent to treatment with active ingredients of the invention. For example, penetration enhancers can be used to assist in delivering the active ingredients to the tissue. Suitable penetration enhancers include, but are not limited to: acetone; various alcohols such as ethanol, oleyl, and tetrahydrofuryl; alkyl sulfoxides such as dimethyl sulfoxide; dimethyl acetamide; dimethyl formamide; polyethylene glycol; pyrrolidones such as polyvinylpyrrolidone; Kollidon grades (Povidone, Polyvidone); urea; and various water-soluble or insoluble sugar esters such as Tween 80 (polysorbate 80) and Span 60 (sorbitan monostearate).
The pH of a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form, or of the tissue to which the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form is applied, may also be adjusted to improve delivery of one or more active ingredients. Similarly, the polarity of a solvent carrier, its ionic strength, or tonicity can be adjusted to improve delivery. Compounds such as stearates can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions or dosage forms to advantageously alter the hydrophilicity or lipophilicity of one or more active ingredients so as to improve delivery. In this regard, stearates can serve as a lipid vehicle for the formulation, as an emulsifying agent or surfactant, and as a delivery-enhancing or penetration-enhancing agent. Different salts, hydrates or solvates of the active ingredients can be used to further adjust the properties of the resulting composition.
4.5.5 MUCOSAL DOSAGE FORMS
Mucosal dosage forms of the invention include, but are not limited to, ophthalmic solutions, sprays and aerosols, or other forms known to one of skill in the art. See, e.g., Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990); and Introduction to Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, 4th ed., Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia (1985). Dosage forms suitable for treating mucosal tissues within the oral cavity can be formulated as mouthwashes or as oral gels. In one embodiment, the aerosol comprises a carrier. In another embodiment, the aerosol is carrier free. A compound of formula V can also be administered directly to the lung by inhalation (see e.g., Tong et al., PCT Application, WO 97/39745; Clark et al, PCT Application, WO 99/47196, which are herein incoφorated by reference). For administration by inhalation, a compound of formula V can be conveniently delivered to the lung by a number of different devices. For example, a Metered Dose Inhaler ("MDI") which utilizes canisters that contain a suitable low boiling propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichloroftuoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, carbon dioxide or other suitable gas can be used to deliver a compound of formula I directly to the lung. MDI devices are available from a number of suppliers such as 3M Coφoration, Aventis, Boehringer Ingleheim, Forest Laboratories, Glaxo-Wellcome, Schering Plough and Nectura. Alternatively, a Dry Powder Inhaler (DPI) device can be used to administer a compound of formula I to the lung (See, e.g., Raleigh et al., Proc. Amer. Assoc. Cancer Research Annual Meeting, 1999, 40, 397, which is herein incoφorated by reference). DPI devices typically use a mechanism such as a burst of gas to create a cloud of dry powder inside a container, which can then be inhaled by the patient. DPI devices are also well known in the art and can be purchased from a number of vendors which include, for example, Fisons, Glaxo-Wellcome, Inhale Therapeutic Systems, ML Laboratories, Qdose and Nectura. A popular variation is the multiple dose DPI ("MDDPI") system, which allows for the delivery of more than one therapeutic dose. MDDPI devices are available from companies such as AstraZeneca, Glaxo Wellcome, IN AX, Schering Plough, SkyePharma and Nectura. For example, capsules and cartridges of gelatin for use in an inhaler or insufflator can be formulated containing a powder mix of the compound and a suitable powder base such as lactose or starch for these systems.
Another type of device that can be used to deliver a compound of formula V to the lung is a liquid spray device supplied, for example, by Aradigm Coφoration. Liquid spray systems use extremely small nozzle holes to aerosolize liquid drug formulations that can then be directly inhaled into the lung.
In a preferred embodiment, a nebulizer device is used to deliver a compound of formula V to the lung. Nebulizers create aerosols from liquid drug formulations by using, for example, ultrasonic energy to form fine particles that can be readily inhaled (See e.g., ^ > ^ ^ _ _ ^ _
Nerschoyle et al, British J Cancer, 1999, 80, Suppl 2, 96, which is herein incoφorated by reference). Examples of nebulizers include devices supplied by Sheffield/Systemic Pulmonary Delivery Ltd. (See, Armer et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,954,047; van der Linden et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,950,619; van der Linden et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,970,974, which are herein incoφorated by reference), Aventis and Batelle Pulmonary Therapeutics. Inhaled compound of formula I, delivered by nebulizer devices, is cmrently under investigation as a treatment for aerodigestive cancer (Engelke et al., Poster 342 at American Association of Cancer Research, San Francisco, Calif, Apr. 1-5, 2000) and lung cancer (Dahl et al., Poster 524 at American Association of Cancer Research, San Francisco, Calif., April 1-5, 2000). In a particularly preferred embodiment, an electrohydrodynamic ("EHD") aerosol device is used to deliver a compound of formula V to the lung. EHD aerosol devices use electrical energy to aerosolize liquid drug solutions or suspensions (see e.g., Noakes et al., U.S. Pat. No. 4,765,539; Coffee, U.S. Pat. No., 4,962,885; Coffee, PCT Application, WO 94/12285; Coffee, PCT Application, WO 94/14543; Coffee, PCT Application, WO 95/26234, Coffee, PCT Application, WO 95/26235, Coffee, PCT Application, WO
95/32807, which are herein incoφorated by reference). The electrochemical properties of the compound of formula I formulation may be important parameters to optimize when delivering this drug to the lung with an EHD aerosol device and such optimization is routinely performed by one of skill in the art. EHD aerosol devices may more efficiently delivery drugs to the lung than existing pulmonary delivery technologies. Other methods of infra-pulmonary delivery of a compound of formula V will be known to the skilled artisan and are within the scope of the invention.
Liquid drug formulations suitable for use with nebulizers and liquid spray devices and EHD aerosol devices will typically include a compound of formula I with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. Preferably, the pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is a liquid such as alcohol, water, polyethylene glycol or a perfluorocarbon. Optionally, another material maybe added to alter the aerosol properties of the solution or suspension of a compound of formula V. Preferably, this material is liquid such as an alcohol, glycol, polyglycol or a fatty acid. Other methods of formulating liquid drug solutions or suspension suitable for use in aerosol devices are known to those of skill in the art (See, e.g., Biesalski, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,112,598; Biesalski, 5,556,611, which are herein incoφorated by reference) A compound of formula I can also be formulated in rectal or vaginal compositions such as suppositories or retention enemas, e.g., containing conventional suppository bases such as cocoa butter or other glycerides. ___ ^ ^ r ^ ^ _ ___ _ h addition to the formulations described previously, a compound of formula V can also be formulated as a depot preparation. Such long acting fonnulations can be administered by implantation (for example subcutaneously or intramuscularly) or by intramuscular injection. Thus, for example, the compounds can be formulated with suitable polymeric or hydrophobic materials (for example, as an emulsion in an acceptable oil) or ion exchange resins, or as sparingly soluble derivatives, for example, as a sparingly soluble salt.
Alternatively, other pharmaceutical delivery systems can be employed. Liposomes and emulsions are well known examples of delivery vehicles that can be used to deliver a compound of formula V. Certain organic solvents such as dimethylsulfoxide can also be employed, although usually at the cost of greater toxicity. A compound of formula I can also be delivered in a controlled release system. In one embodiment, a pump can be used (Sefton, CRC Crit. Ref Biomed Eng., 1987, 14, 201; Buchwald et al., Surgery, 1980, 88, 507; Saudek et al., N. Engl. J Med, 1989, 321, 574). In another embodiment, polymeric materials can be used (see Medical Applications of Controlled Release, Langer and Wise (eds.), CRC Pres., Boca Raton, Fla. (1974); Controlled Drug Bioavailability, Drug Product Design and Performance, Smolen and Ball (eds.), Wiley, New York (1984); Ranger and Peppas, J Macromol. Sci. Rev. Macromol. Chem., 1983, 23, 61; see also Levy et al., Science 1985, 228, 190; During et al., Ann. Neural., 1989,25,351; Howard et al, 1989, J. Neurosurg. 71, 105). In yet another embodiment, a confrolled-release system can be placed in proximity of the target of the compounds of the invention, e.g., the lung, thus requiring only a fraction of the systemic dose (see, e.g., Goodson, in Medical Applications of Controlled Release, supra, vol. 2, pp. 115 (1984)). Other confrolled-release system can be used (see e.g. Langer, Science, 1990, 249, 1527). Suitable excipients (e.g., carriers and diluents) and other materials that can be used to provide mucosal dosage forms encompassed by this invention are well known to those skilled in the pharmaceutical arts, and depend on the particular site or method which a given pharmaceutical composition or dosage form will be administered. With that fact in mind, typical excipients include, but are not limited to, water, ethanol, ethylene glycol, propylene glycol, butane- 1,3 -diol, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, mineral oil, and mixtures thereof, which are non-toxic and pharmaceutically acceptable. Examples of such additional ingredients are well known in the art. See, e.g., Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th eds., Mack Publishing, Easton PA (1990). a ^ ^ ^ _ w μ ^
The pH of a pharmaceutical composition or dosage form, or of the tissue to which the pharmaceutical composition or dosage form is applied, can also be adjusted to improve delivery of one or more active ingredients. Similarly, the polarity of a solvent carrier, its ionic strength, or tonicity can be adjusted to improve delivery. Compounds such as stearates can also be added to pharmaceutical compositions or dosage fonns to advantageously alter the hydrophilicity or lipophilicity of one or more active ingredients so as to improve delivery. In this regard, stearates can serve as a lipid vehicle for the fonnulation, as an emulsifying agent or surfactant, and as a delivery-enhancing or penetration-enhancing agent. Different salts, hydrates or solvates of the active ingredients can be used to further adjust the properties of the resulting composition.
5. EXAMPLES
The following examples employ methodology which can be used to prepare all of the compounds embodied in this invention, provided the appropriate reagents and substrates are utilized, and minor variations of the described conditions are maintained. Such variations would be easily performed by one of skill in the art without undue experimentation given the description below.
5.1 EXAMPLE 1: SYNTHESIS OF 3-[2-(4-ISOPROPYL-
3-METHYL-PHENOXYl-ACETYLAMINOl-BENZOIC ACID
A solution of methyl 3-aminobenzoate (10.0 g, 66.2 mmol) and diisopropylethylamme (13.0 mL, 74.6 mmol) in tefrahydrofuran (100 mL) was cooled to
0°C under inert atmosphere, and a solution of bromoacetyl bromide (6.3 mL, 72.3 mmol) in tefrahydrofuran (50 mL) was added dropwise with stirring. After 12 h, the mixture was partitioned between water and ethyl acetate (200 mL each), and separated. The organic phase was washed with water and brine, and the aqueous phases were back-extracted in sequence with ethyl acetate. The organic extracts were combined, dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered and evaporated. The residue was triturated with ether and collected by filtration to afford, after vacuum drying, the product, 3-(2-bromo-acetylamino)- benzoic acid methyl ester, as a solid, m.p. 91-92 °C (14.05 g, 51.6 mmol, 78%). TLC RF
0.18 (30:70 ethyl acetate-hexane). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13): δ 8.27 (IH, br s), 8.05 (IH, t, J = 1.9 Hz), 7.91 (IH, ddd, J = 8.2, 2.3, 0.9 Hz), 7.84 (IH, dt, J = 7.9, 1.3 Hz), 7.45 (IH, t,
J = 7.9 Hz), 4.04 (2H, s), 3.92 (3H, s).
A solution of 3-(2-bromo-acetylamino)-benzoic acid methyl ester (1.80 g, 6.61 mmol), 4-isopropyl-3-methylphenol (1.00 g, 6.61 mmol) and potassium carbonate (1.00 g, ^ _ Λ _ _,„ ]iΛ
7.23 mmol) in 2-butanone (15 mL) was heated to reflux under inert atmosphere with stirring for 12 h. After cooling, the mixture was partitioned between water and ethyl acetate (50 mL each). The aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate, and the extracts were washed with brine, combined, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and evaporated. The residual material was separated on a column (silica gel) with 20:80 ethyl acetate-hexane, and the eluant containing the product was evaporated to afford pure methyl 3-[2-(4-isopropyl-3- methyl-phenoxy)acetylamino]benzoate, as a glassy solid (1.64 g, 4.80 mmol, 73%). TLC RF 0.41 (30:70 ethyl acetate-hexane). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13): δ 8.39 (IH, br s), 8.05 (IH, t, J = 1.8 Hz), 7.99 (IH, ddd, J = 8.0, 2.2, 1.1 Hz), 7.80 (IH, dt, J = 7.7, 1.3 Hz), 7.42 (IH, t, J = 7.9 Hz), 7.18 (IH, d, J = 8.8 Hz), 6.81-6.77 (2H, m), 4.57 (2H, s), 3.90 (3H, s), 3.07 (IH, heptet, J = 7.0 Hz), 2.32 (3H, s), 1.18 (6H, d, J = 7.0 Hz). MS (ESI): m/e 344 (3), 343 (22), 342 (100).
A solution of methyl 3-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)acetylamino] benzoate (948 mg, 2.78 mmol) and lithium iodide (3.72 g, 27.8 mmol) in anhydrous pyridine (15 mL) was heated to reflux for 20 h, then cooled and evaporated. The residue was taken up in water, and extracted twice with ethyl acetate. The extracts were washed with 1 N hydrochloric acid and brine, combined, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and evaporated to afford a semisolid mixture. The mixture was fractionally crystallized using ether-hexane to afford the title product as a solid, collected by filtration and dried under vacuum, m.p. 188-189 °C (772 mg, 2.36 mmol, 85%). 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13): δ 8.44 (IH, br s), 8.03-7.96 (2H, m), 7.79 (IH, dt, J = 7.7, 1.3 Hz), 7.39 (IH, t, J = 7.9 Hz), 7.14 (IH, d, J = 8.8 Hz), 6.79-6.73 (2H, m), 4.54 (2H, s), 3.03 (IH, heptet, J = 7.0 Hz), 2.28 (3H, s), 1.14 (6H, d, J = 7.0 Hz). MS (ESI): m/e 330 (3), 329 (21), 328 (100). Elemental analysis: calc. for C19H21NO4-0.1H2O C 69.33, H 6.49, N 4.25; observed C 69.22, H 6.53, N 4.17.
5.2 EXAMPLE 2: SYNTHESIS OF 3-[2-(4-ISOPROPYL-
3-METHYL-PHENOXYVTHIOACETYLAMINOl-BENZOIC ACID
A solution of methyl 3-[2-(4-isoproρyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)acetylamino] benzoate
(1.05 g, 3.08 mmol) in toluene (50 mL) was treated with 2,4-bis(4-methoxyphenyl)-l,3,2,4- dithiadiphosphetane 2,4-disulfide (Review: Cava, M. P.; Levinson, M. I. Tetrahedron 1985,
41(22), 5061-87) (0.77 g, 1.90 mmol). The solution was heated to reflux for 4.5 h, then cooled and evaporated. The residual material was separated by column chromatography
(10:90 ethyl acetate-hexane) to afford the product, 3-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl- phenoxy)thioacetylamino]benzoate, as a yellow oil (1.08 g, 3.02 mmol, 98%). TLC Rf 0.31
Figure imgf000070_0001
(silica gel, 30:70 ethyl acetate-hexane). 1H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz): δ 9.83 (IH, br s), 8.29 (IH, t, J = 2.2 Hz), 8.22 (IH, ddd, J = 8.2, 2.2, 1.1 Hz), 7.94 (IH, dt, J = 7.7, 1.4 Hz), 7.49 (IH, t, J = 8.0 Hz), 7.18 (IH, d, J = 8.8 Hz), 6.82-6.78 (2H, m), 4.94 (2H, s), 3.92 (3H, s), 3.07 (IH, m, J = 6.9 Hz), 2.32 (3H, s), 1.19 (6H, d, J = 6.9 Hz). A solution of 3-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)thioacetylamino]benzoate (0.50 g, 1.4 mmol) in pyridine (15 mL) was treated with anhydrous lithium iodide (1.87 g), and the resulting mixture was heated to reflux for 10 h. The solution was cooled and evaporated, and the residue was partitioned between 1 N aqueous HCl and ethyl acetate. The organic layer was washed with water and brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and evaporated. The residual solid was purified by column chromatography to afford the title product (0.22 g, 0.64 mmol, 46%). m.p. 174-176°C. 1H NMR (CDCI3, 300 MHz): δ 9.84 (IH, br s), 8.39 (IH, t, J = 2 Hz), 8.28 (IH, ddd, J = 8, 2, 1 Hz), 8.00 (IH, dt, J = 8, 2 Hz), 7.55 (IH, t, J = 8 Hz), 7.19 (IH, d, J = 8 Hz), 6.83-6.77 (2H, m), 4.97 (2H, s), 3.03 (IH, m, J = 7 Hz), 2.32 (3H, s), 1.20 (6H, d, J = 7 Hz). Mass spectrum (ES-)-" m/z 42- Elemental analysis: calculated for C19H21NO3S C 66.45, H 6.16, N 4.08; observed C 66.71, H 6.65, N 4.02.
5.3 EXAMPLE 3: SYNTHESIS OF 3-{N-[2-(4-ISOPROPYL- 3-METHYL-PHENOXY)-ACETYL- N-METHYLAMINOn-BENZOIC ACID A suspension of sodium hydride (0.16 g, 55% w/w) was washed free of mineral oil and taken up in DMF (5 mL). The solution was cooled in an ice bath while a solution of 3- [2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)acetylamino]benzoate (0.80 g, 2.34 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) was added. The mixture was allowed to stir for 1 h, then was treated with methyl iodide (0.60 g), and the resulting mixture stirred overnight. It was diluted with ethyl acetate (50 mL), and this was washed with three 50 mL portions of water and then brine. The aqueous phases were back-extracted in sequence with ethyl acetate, and the organic extracts were combined, dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and evaporated. The residue was separated by column chromatography to afford the product, methyl 3-[N-[2-(4- isopropyl-3-methylphenoxy)-acetyl]-N-methylamino]-benzoate, as a pale yellow oil (0.68 g, 1.91 mmol, 82%). 1H NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ 8.03 (IH, d, J = 7.6 Hz), 7.90 (IH, t, J =
2.1 Hz), 7.51 (IH, t, J = 7.9 Hz), 7.44 (IH, dd, J = 8.0, 1.7 Hz), 7.06 (IH, dd, J = 9.1, 5.3
Hz), 6.59-6.52 (IH, m), 4.38 (2H, s), 3.93 (3H, s), 3.32 (3H, s), 3.02 (IH, m, J = 7.0 Hz),
2.25 (3H, s), 1.15 (6H, d, J = 7.0 Hz). Mass spectrum (ES+): m/z 357 (22), 356 (100).
A solution of methyl 3-[N-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methylphenoxy)-acetyl]-N- methylaminoj-benzoate (0.30 g, 8.45 mmol) in pyridine (20 mL) was treated with lithium c ^ . ....... iodide (1.90 g), and the resulting mixture heated to reflux for 6 h. The mixture was cooled and partially evaporated, and the residual material was taken up in ethyl acetate (50 mL). This was washed with 1 N aqueous HCl (2 x 10 mL) and water, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and evaporated to afford the title product as a white powder (0.12 g, 3.52 mmol, 42%). m.p. 161-162°C. 1H NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ 8.03 (IH, d, J = 7 Hz), 7.91 (IH, t, J = 2 hz), 7.55-7.42 (2H, m), 7.00 (IH, d, J = 8 Hz), 6.45 (2H, br s), 4.38 (2H, s), 3.29 (3H, s), 2.96 (IH, m, J = 7 Hz), 2.20 (3H, s), 1.08 (6H, d, J = 7 Hz). Mass spectrum (ES+): m/z 343 (20), 342 (100). Elemental analysis: calculated for C2oH23NO4-0.154H2O C 69.79, H 6.83, N 4.07; observed C 69.81, H 6.69, N 3.86. 5.4 EXAMPLE 4: SYNTHESIS OF 4-CHLORO-3-[2-(4-
ISOPROPYL-3-METHYL-PHENOXY)- ACETYLAMINO1-BENZOIC ACID
A solution of 4-isopropyl-3-methylphenol (10.0 g, 67 mmol), methyl bromoacetate (6.6 mL, 70 mmol) and anhydrous potassium carbonate (10.1 g, 73 mmol) in 2-butanone ( 100 mL) was heated to reflux for 20 h. The mixture was cooled and partitioned between water (350 mL) and ethyl acetate (100 mL). The organic phase was washed with brine, and the aqueous phases were back-extracted in sequence with more ethyl acetate. The extracts were combined, dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered and evaporated to afford sufficiently pure product, methyl 2-(4-isopropyl-3-methylphenoxy)acetate, as an oil (15.0 g, 67 mmol, 100%). 1H NMR (CDC13, 300 MHz): δ 7.05 (IH, d, J - 9.3 Hz), 6.64-6.58 (2H, m), 4.51 (2H, s), 3.71 (3H, s), 2.98 (IH, m, J = 7.0 Hz), 2.22 (3H, s), 1.11 (6H, d, J = 7.0 Hz).
A solution of methyl 2-(4-isopropyl-3-methylphenoxy)acetate (13.0 g, 58.5 mmol) in abs. ethanol (240 mL) was treated with aq. sodium hydroxide solution (13 mL, 5 M). The resulting solution was stirred for 4 h at ambient temperature, then poured into aq. HCl (800 mL, 1 N). This was extracted with ether (2 x 200 mL), and the extracts were washed with brine, combined, dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered and evaporated to afford the solid product, 2-(4-isopropyl-3-methylphenoxy)acetic acid, which was dried under vacuum (12.0 g, 58.5 mmol, 100%). 1H NMR (d6-DMSO, 300 MHz): δ 12.91 (IH, s), 7.12 (IH, d, J = 8 Hz), 6.70-6.65 (2H, m), 4.58 (2H, s), 3.02 (IH, m, J = 6.7 Hz), 2.24 (3H, s),
1.12 (6H, d, J = 6.7 Hz).
A suspension of 2-(4-isopropyl-3-methylphenoxy)acetic acid (1.50 g, 7.2 mmol) and catalytic dimethylformamide (3 drops) in dichloromethane (100 mL) was treated with a solution of oxalyl chloride (1.80 mL, 21.9 mmol) in dichloromethane (10 mL) dropwise over 20 min. After stirring for an additional 4 h, the solution was evaporated and taken up in THF (60 mL). One-half of this solution (ca. 3.6 mmol acid chloride) was added dropwise to an ice-cooled solution of 5-amino-2-chlorobenzoic acid (0.62 g, 3.6 mmol) and pyridine (0.87 mL, 11 mmol) in THF (5 mL). The resulting solution was stined for 20 h, then partitioned between water and ethyl acetate (100 mL each). The organic layer was washed with 1 N aq. HCl and brine, and the aqueous phases were back-extracted in sequence with ethyl acetate. The exfracts were combined, dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered and evaporated. The resulting solid was triturated with 1 : 1 ethyl acetate, refiltered and dried under vacuum to afford the title product (1.20 g, 3.6 mmol, 100%). m.p. 174-175°C. 1H NMR (d6-DMSO): δ 10.28 (IH, s), 8.13 (IH, t, J = 1.8 Hz), 7.79 (IH, dt, J = 8, 2 Hz), 7.46 (IH, dd, J = 8, 2 Hz), 7.13 (IH, dd, J = 8, 1.6 Hz), 6.79-6.71 (2H, m), 4.62 (2H, s), 3.00 (IH, m, J = 6.6 Hz), 2.25 (3H, s), 1.12 (6H, d, J = 6.6 Hz). Mass spectrum (ES+): m/z 364 (33), 362 (100). Elemental analysis: calculated for C19H20C1NO4 C 63.07, H 5.57, N 3.87; observed C 62.87, H 5.58, N 3.67.
5.5 EXAMPLE 5: IDENTIFICATION AND CHARACTERIZATION OF COMPOUNDS THAT PROMOTE NONSENSE SUPPRESSION
AND/OR MODULATE TRANSLATION TERMINATION
The assays described above in Section 4.2 were used in two high throughput screens. Compounds were screened in the cell-based and biochemical assays. Compounds were tested, resynthesized and tested again to confirm chemical structures. 3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3- methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino] -benzoic acid, sodium salt was characterized further with the in vitro luciferase nonsense suppression assay. To ensure that the observed nonsense suppression activity of the selected compounds was not limited to the rabbit reticulocyte assay system, HeLa cell extract was prepared and optimized (Lie & Macdonald, 1999, Development 126(22):4989-4996 and Lie & Macdonald, 2000, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 270(2):473-481).
5.5.1 CHARACTERIZATION OF COMPOUNDS THAT INCREASE NONSENSE SUPPRESSION AND PRODUCE FUNCTIONAL PROTEIN
It was previously demonstrated that compounds of the invention increase the level of nonsense suppression in the biochemical assay three to four fold over untreated extracts. To determine whether compounds also function in vivo, a stable cell line harboring the UGA nonsense-containing luciferase gene was treated with selected compounds. Cells were grown in standard medium supplemented with 1% penicillin-streptomycin (P/S) and 10% fetal bovine serum (FBS) to 70% confluency and split 1 : 1 the day before treatment. On the following day, cells were trypsinized and 40,000 cells were added to each well of a 96-well ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ _ tissue culture dish. Serial dilutions of each compound were prepared to generate a six-point dose response curve spanning 2 logs (30μM to 0.3 μM). The final concentration of the DMSO solvent remained constant at 1% in each well. Cells treated with 1% DMSO served as the background standard, and cells treated with gentamicin served as a positive control. 5.5.2 3-[2-(4-ISOPROPYL-3-METHYL-PHENOXY)-
ACETYLAMINO]-BENZOIC ACID, SODIUM SALT ALTERS THE ACCESSIBILITY OF THE CHEMICAL MODIFYING AGENTS TO SPECIFIC NUCLEOTIDES IN THE 28S RRNA
Previous studies have demonstrated that gentamicin and other members of the aminoglycoside family that decrease the fidelity of translation bind to the A site of the 16S rRNA. By chemical footprinting, UN cross-linking and ΝMR, gentamicin has been shown to bind at the A site (comprised of nucleotides 1400-1410 and 1490-1500, E. coli numbering) of the rRΝA at nucleotides 1406, 1407, 1494, and 1496 (Moazed & Νoller, 1987, Nature 327(6121):389-394; Woodcock et al., 1991, EMBOJ. 10(10):3099-3103; and Schroeder et al., 2000, EMBO J. 19 : 1 -9
Ribosomes prepared from HeLa cells were incubated with the small molecules (at a concentration of 100 μM), followed by treatment with chemical modifying agents (dimethyl sulfate [DMS] and kethoxal [KE]). Following chemical modification, rRΝA was phenol- chlorofonn extracted, ethanol precipitated, analyzed in primer extension reactions using end-labeled oligonucleotides hybridizing to different regions of the three rRΝAs and resolved on 6% polyacrylamide gels. The probes used for primer extension cover the entire 18S (7 oligonucleotide primers), 28S (24 oligonucleotide primers), and 5S (one primer) rRΝAs. Controls in these experiments include DMSO (a control for changes in rRΝA accessibility induced by DMSO), paromomycin (a marker for 18S rRΝA binding), and anisomycin (a marker for 28S rRΝA binding).
The results of these foot-printing experiments indicated that 3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3- methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid, sodium salt alters the accessibility of the chemical modifying agents to specific nucleotides in the 28S rRΝA. More specifically, the regions protected by 3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)- acetylamino] -benzoic acid, sodium salt include: (1) a conserved region in the vicinity of the peptidyl transferase center (domain N) implicated in peptide bond formation and (2) a conserved region in domain II that may interact with the peptidyl transferase center based on binding of vernamycinin B to both these areas. 5.5.3 READTHROUGH OF PREMATURE TERMINATION CODONS IN CELL-BASED DISEASE MODELS
To address the effects of the nonsense-suppressing compounds on niRNAs altered in specific inherited diseases, a bronchial epithelial cell line harboring a nonsense codon at amino acid 1282 (W1282X) was treated with 3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)- acetylamino] -benzoic acid, sodium salt (20μM) and CFTR function was monitored as a cAMP-activated chloride channel using the SPQ assay (Yang et al., 1993, Hum Mol Genet. 2(8):1253-1261 and Howard et al., 1996, Nat Med. 2(4):467-469). These experiments showed that cAMP treatment of these cells resulted in an increase in SPQ fluorescence, consistent with stimulation of CFTR-mediated halide efflux. No increase in fluorescence was observed when cells were not freated with compound or if the cells were not stimulated with cAMP. These results indicate that the full-length CFTR expressed from this nonsense- containing allele following compound treatment also functions as a cAMP-stimulated anion channel, thus demonstrating that cystic fibrosis cell lines increase chloride channel activity when freated with 3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid, sodium salt.
5.5.4 PRIMARY CELLS FROM THE MDX NONSENSE- CONTAINING MOUSE EXPRESS FULL-LENGTH DYSTROPHIN PROTEIN WHEN TREATED WITH 3-[2-(4-ISOPROPYL-3-METHYL-
PHENOXY)- ACETYLAMINOl-BENZOIC ACID. SODIUM SALT
The mutation in the mdx mouse that premature termination of the 427 kDa dystrophin polypeptide has been shown to be a C to T transition at position 3185 in exon 23 (Sicinski et al., 1989, Science. 244(4912):1578-1580). Mouse primary skeletal muscle cultures derived from 1-day old mdx mice were prepared as described previously (Barton- Davis et al., 1999, J Clin Invest. 104(4):375-381). Cells were cultured for 10 days in the presence of 3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid, sodium salt (20 μM). Culture medium was replaced every four days and the presence of dystrophin in myoblast cultures was detected by immunostaining as described previously (Barton-Davis et al., 1999, J Clin Invest. 104(4):375-381). A primary monoclonal antibody to the C- terminus of the dystrophin protein (F19A12) was used undiluted and rhodamine conjugated anti-mouse IgG was used as the secondary antibody. The F19A12 antibody will detect the full-length protein produced by suppression of the nonsense codon. Staining was viewed using a Leica DMR micropscope, digital camera, and associated imaging software at the
University of Pennsylvania. 5.5.5 READTHROUGH OF PREMATURE TERMINATION CODONS IN THE MDX MOUSE
As previously described (Barton-Davis et al., 1999, J Clin Invest. 104(4):375-381), compound was delivered by Alzet osmotic pumps implanted under the skin of anesthetized mice. Two doses of 3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)- acetylamino] -benzoic acid, sodium salt were administered. Gentamicin served as a positive control and pumps filled with solvent only served as the negative control. Pumps were loaded with appropriate compound such that the calculated doses to which tissue was exposed were 10 μM and 20 μM. The gentamicin concentration was calculated to achieve tissue exposure of approximately 200 μM. In the initial experiment, mice were freated for 14 days, after which animals were anesthetized with ketamine and exsanguinated. The tibialis anterior (TA) muscle of the experimental animals was then excised, frozen, and used for immunofluorescence analysis of dystrophin incoφoration into striated muscle. The presence of dystrophin in TA muscles was detected by immunostaining, as described previously (Barton-Davis et al., 1999, J Clin Invest. 104(4):375-381).
5.6 EXAMPLE 6: 200 MG DOSAGE CAPSULE
Table 3 illustrates a batch formulation and single dosage formulation for a 200 mg 3-[2-(3'-methyl-biphen-4-yloxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid single dose unit, i.e., about 40 percent by weight.
Table 3. Formulation for 200 mg capsule
Figure imgf000075_0001
The pregelatinized corn starch (SPRESS B-820) and 3-[2-(3'-methyl-biphen-4- yloxy)-acetylamino] -benzoic acid components are passed through a 710 μ m screen and then are loaded into a Diffusion Mixer with a baffle insert and blended for 15 minutes. The magnesium stearate is passed through a 210 μ m screen and is added to the Diffusion Mixer. tr- in.... it * «- t t- » β i „as „-ρ e .."»■ J i_S ..."f.
The blend is then encapsulated in a size #0 capsule, 500 mg per capsule (8400 capsule batch size) using a Dosator type capsule filling machine.
5.7 EXAMPLE 7: 100 MG ORAL DOSAGE FORM
Table 4 illustrates a batch formulation and a single dose unit formulation containing 100 mg of 3-[2-(4-cyclopentyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid.
7αb e 4. Formulation for 100 mg tablet
Figure imgf000076_0001
The microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, and 3-[2-(4-cyclopentyl- phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid components are passed through a #30 mesh screen (about 430μ to about 655μ). The Pluronic F-68® (manufactured by JRH Biosciences, Inc. of Lenexa, KS) surfactant is passed through a #20 mesh screen (about 457μ to about 1041μ). The Pluronic F-68® surfactant and 0.5 kgs of croscarmellose sodium are loaded into a 16 qt. twin shell tumble blender and are mixed for about 5 minutes. The mix is then transfened to a 3 cubic foot twin shell tumble blender where the microcrystalline cellulose is added and blended for about 5 minutes. The thalidomide is added and blended for an additional 25 minutes. This pre-blend is passed through a roller compactor with a hammer mill attached at the discharge of the roller compactor and moved back to the tumble blender.
The remaining croscarmellose sodium and magnesium stearate is added to the tumble blender and blended for about 3 minutes. The final mixture is compressed on a rotary tablet press with 250 mg per tablet (200,000 tablet batch size). ^ ._ _ _
5.8 EXAMPLE 8: AEROSOL DOSAGE FORM
A concentrate is prepared by combining 3-[2-(4-trifluoromethoxy-phenoxy)- acetylaminoj-benzoic acid, and a 12.6 kg portion of the trichloromonofluoromethane in a sealed stainless steel vessel equipped with a high shear mixer. Mixing is carried out for about 20 minutes. The bulk suspension is then prepared in the sealed vessel by combining the concentrate with the balance of the propellants in a bulk product tank that is temperature controlled to 21° to 27 °C. and pressure controlled to 2.8 to 4.0 BAR. 17 ml aerosol containers which have a metered valve which is designed to provide 100 inhalations of the composition of the invention. Each container is provided with the following:
ipratropium bromide, 0.0021 g
3-[2-(4-trifluoromethoxy-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid 0.0120 g trichloromonofluoromethane 1.6939 g dichlorodifluoromethane 3.7028g dichlorotetrafluoroethane 1.5766 g total 7.0000 g
While the invention has been described with respect to the particular embodiments, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various changes and modifications may be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention as defined in the claims. Such modifications are also intended to fall within the scope of the appended claims.

Claims

_ .,..- .. . uWHAT IS CLAIMED:
1. A compound of the formula I :
Figure imgf000078_0001
I or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymoφhs, stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers, thereof wherein:
X is oxygen, sulfur, CO, SO or S(O)2;
Y is oxygen or sulfur; Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl; n is an integer from 0 to 4;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or misubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R7, CF3, CN, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R° is hydrogen, or taken together with R1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring;
R2, R3, R4 and R5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or N(R7)2;
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or xmsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or _ .„„„ .„ .. ^ xmsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3; with the proviso that when X is O, Y is O, n is 0 and R1 is hydrogen, then Z is not 4-chlorophenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, or 2,4-dichlorophenyl; and with the proviso that when X is O, Y is O, n is 0, R1 is hydrogen, and Z is unsubstituted phenyl at least one of R2-R5 is not hydrogen; and with the proviso that when R3 is COOH, R2, R4, and R5 are not all halogen.
2. A compound having the formula:
Figure imgf000079_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, clathrate, or stereoisomer thereof wherein:
X is oxygen or sulfur;
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl; R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, halogen, SO2R7, CF3, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R2, R3, R4 and R5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, orNR7 2; and R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occunence of R is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or ^ _ ^ _ _ ^ unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3; with the proviso that when X is O and R1 is hydrogen, then Z is not 4- chlorophenyl, 4-methylphenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, or 2,4-dichlorophenyl; and with the proviso that when X is O, R1 is hydrogen, and Z is unsubstituted phenyl at least one of R2-R5 is not hydrogen; and with the proviso that when R3 is COOH, R2, R4, and R5 are not all halogen.
3. A compound having the formula:
Figure imgf000080_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, clathrate, or stereoisomer thereof wherein: X is oxygen or sulfur;
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or xmsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or misubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R2,CF3, CN, COOH, COR2, or COOR2;
R is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOR2, SO2, NO2, NH2, or NR2 2;
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or xmsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R2 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or
Figure imgf000081_0001
unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3; with the proviso that when R1 is hydrogen, then Z is not 4-chlorophenyl, 4- methylphenyl, 3-chlorophenyl, or 2,4-dichlorophenyl.
4. A compound having the formula:
IV or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymoφhs, stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers, thereof wherein:
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R7, CF3, CN, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R° is hydrogen, or taken together with R1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring;
R' are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or xmsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or N(R7)2; and
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group.
5. The compound of claim 1 wherein R6 is a biohydrolyzable ester.
6. The compound of claim 2 wherein R6 is a biohydrolyzable ester. , ,,, „ „- ,„ ^
7. The compound of claim 3 wherein R2 is a biohydrolyzable ester.
8. The compound of claim 3 wherein R is not hydrogen.
9. The compound of claim 3 wherein Z is 4-isopropyl-3 -methylphenyl, 3- isopropyl-5 -methylphenyl, 2'-methyl-biphenyl-4-yl, 3'-methyl-biphenyl-4-yl, 4-propyl- phenyl, 4-(l,l-dimethyl-propyl)-phenyl, 5,6,7,8,-tetrahydronaphthalen-2-yl, 4-tert-butyl- phenyl, 4-cyclopentyl-phenyl, or 4-trifluoromethoxyphenyl.
10. The compound of claim 3 wherein, Z is 4-isopropyl-3 -methylphenyl and R1 and R are hydrogen.
11. The compound of claim 3 wherein, Z is 3-isopropyl-5-methylphenyl and R1 and R are hydrogen.
12. The compound of claim 3 wherein, Z is 2'-methyl-biphenyl-4-yl and R1 and R are hydrogen.
13. The compound of claim 3 wherein, Z is 3'-methyl-biphenyl-4-yl and R1 and R are hydrogen.
14. The compoxmd of claim 3 wherein, Z is 4-propyl-phenyl and R1 and R are hydrogen.
15. The compound of claim 3 wherein, Z is 4-( 1 , 1 -dimethyl-propyl)-phenyl and R1 and R are hydrogen.
16. The compound of claim 3 wherein, Z is 5,6,7,8,-tetrahydronaphthalen-2-yl and R1 and R are hydrogen.
17. The compoxmd of claim 3 wherein, Z is 4-tert-butyl-phenyl and R1 and R are hydrogen.
18. The compound of claim 3 wherein, Z is 4-cyclopentyl-phenyl and R1 and R are hydrogen. ^ ,„„.. ._ „. . _ ^
19. The compoxmd of claim 3 wherein, Z is 4-trifluoromethoxyphenyl and R1 and R are hydrogen.
20. A compound selected from the group consisting of:
3 - [2-(4-isopropyl-3 -methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino] -benzoic acid; 3-[2-(3-isopropyl-5-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-trifluoromethoxy-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-iodo-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(indan-5-ylpxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-naphthalen-2-yloxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 3-{2-[4-(l-methyl-l-phenyl-ethyl)-phenoxy]-acetylamino}-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-tert-butyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-cyclopentyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-{2-[4-(l,l-dimethyl-propyl)-phenoxy]acetylamino)-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-propyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 3-[2-(4-trifluromethyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(3,4-dichloro-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(2'-methyl-biphenyl-4-yloxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(3 '-methyl-biphenyl-4yloxy)-acetylamino-benzoic acid; 4-chloro-3-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-{N-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetyl-N-methylamino]}-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-thioacetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Isopropyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pynolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Isopropyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pynolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid Sodium Salt; 3-[3-(Indan-5-yloxy)-2-oxo-pynolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(Benzo[l,3]dioxol-5-yloxy)-2-oxo-pynolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-{2-Oxo-3-[4-(4-frifluoromethyl-phenoxy)-phenoxy]-pyrrolidin-l-yl}- benzoic acid;
3 - [3 -(3 -Ethyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin- 1 -yl] -benzoic acid; 3-[2-Oxo-3-(4-phenoxy-phenoxy)-pynolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(2-Isopropyl-5-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(2-Isopropyl-5-methyl-phenoxy)-propionylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(5-Methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 3-[2-(2-Isopropyl-ρhenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(2-Isopropyl-5-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-4-methoxy-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(5-Isopropyl-2-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid, Sodium salt; 3 - [2-(4-Isopropyl-3 -methyl-phenoxy)-propionylamino] -benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-4-methyl-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Bromo-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Carboxy-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Acetyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 3 -[2-(Naphthalen-2-yloxy)-acetylamino] -benzoic acid;
3-[2-(Benzo[l,3]dioxol-5-yloxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Chloro-3-fluoro-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Hydroxymethyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
2-Hydroxy-5-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 2-Chloro-5-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
2,3,6-Trifluoro-5-[2-(4-isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Isopropyl-3-methyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-2-methyl-benzoic acid;
3-{2-[4-(2-Ethoxycarbonyl-vinyl)-phenoxy]-acetylamino} -benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Benzyloxy-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 3 -[2-(4-Cyano-phenoxy)-acetylamino] -benzoic acid;
3-{2-[4-(5-Nitro-pyridin-2-ylamino)-phenoxy]-acetylamino}-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Benzoylamino-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Phenylamino-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(3-Phenylamino-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 3- {2-[4-(2,4-Dinifro-phenylamino)-phenoxy]-acetylamino} -benzoic acid;
3- {2-[4-(4-Trifluoromethyl-phenoxy)-phenoxy]-acetylamino} -benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Benzyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(4-Phenoxy-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-(5-Nitro-pyridin-2-yloxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid; 3-{2-[4-(l,3-Dioxo-l,3-dihydro-isoindol-2-ylmethyl)-phenoxy]-acetylamino}- benzoic acid;
3-(2- {4-[4-(l ,3-Dioxo- 1 ,3-dihydro-isoindol-2-yl)-butoxymethyl]-phenoxy} - acetylamino)-benzoic acid; _ _ _ ^^ _ M ^
3-{2-[4-(4,6-Dimethyl-pyrimidin-2-ylsulfanylmethyl)-phenoxy]-acetylamino}- benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Chloro-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pynolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Bromo-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid; 3-[2-(4-Cyanomethyl-phenoxy)-acetylamino]-benzoic acid;
3-{2-[4-(2H-Tefrazol-5-ylmethyl)-phenoxy]-acetylamino}-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Isopropyl-benzyloxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3 - {2- [4-(5 -Phenyl- [1,3,4] oxadiazol-2-ylmethyl)-phenoxy] -acetylamino } -benzoic acid; 3-[3-(4-Nitro-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Methoxy-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pynolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Ethyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-Methyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pynolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid;
3-[2-Oxo-3-(2,3,5-trifluoro-4-methyl-phenoxy)-pynolidin-l-yl]-benzoic acid; 3-[2-Oxo-3 -(4-trifluoromethoxy-phenoxy)-pynolidin- 1 -yl] -benzoic acid;
3 - [3 -(3 -Isopropyl-5-methyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pynolidin- 1 -yl] -benzoic acid;
3-[3-(4-tert-Butyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pyrrolidin- 1 -yl]-benzoic acid;
3 - [3 -(3 ,4-Dimethyl-phenoxy)-2-oxo-pynolidin- 1 -yl] -b enzoic acid and pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, solvates, clathrates and stereoisomers thereof.
21. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound according to claim 1, 2, 3, 4or 20 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
22. A unit dosage form comprising a compound according to claim 1, 2 , 3, 4 or 20 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
23. A method for modulating premature translation termination or nonsense- mediated mRNA decay in a cell comprising contacting a cell exhibiting premature translation termination or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay with an effective amount of a compound of the formula V:
Figure imgf000085_0001
Figure imgf000086_0001
or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymoφhs, stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers thereof wherein:
X is oxygen, sulfur, CO, SO or S(O)2; Y is oxygen or sulfur;
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl; n is an integer from 0 to 4;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R7, CF3, CN, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R° is hydrogen, or taken together with R1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring; R2, R3, R4 and R5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or xmsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or N(R7)2; R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occunence of R is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or xmsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF .
24. The method of claim 23 comprising contacting a cell exhibiting premature translation termination or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay with an effective amount of a compound of the formula: _ |
Figure imgf000087_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, clathrate, or stereoisomer thereof wherein:
X is oxygen or sulfur; Z is substituted or xmsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, halogen, SO2R7, CF3, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R , R , R and R are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or NR7 2; and
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or misubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or misubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occmrence of R7 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or misubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3.
25. The method of claim 24 comprising contacting a cell exhibiting premature translation termination or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay with an effective amoimt of a compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000088_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, clathrate, or stereoisomer thereof wherein:
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or misubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R2, CF3, CN, COOH, COR2, or COOR2; R is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOR2, SO2R2, NO2, NH2, or NR2 2; R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or misubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occmrrence of R2 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3.
26. The method of claim 23 comprising contacting a cell exhibiting premature translation termination or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay with an effective amount of a compoxmd of the formula:
Figure imgf000088_0002
u .,_ .- , „„.
Figure imgf000089_0001
or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymoφhs, stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers, thereof wherein:
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or xmsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R7, CF3, CN, COOH, COR7, or COOR7; R° is hydrogen, or taken together with R1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring;
R' are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or misubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF , OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or N(R7)2; and
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group.
27. A method of treating or preventing a disease ameliorated by modulation of premature translation termination or nonsense-mediated mRNA decay, or ameliorating one or more symptoms associated therewith comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of formula V:
Figure imgf000089_0002
or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymoφhs, stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers thereof wherein:
X is oxygen, sulfur, CO, SO or S(O)2; Y is oxygen or sulfur; ^ r ___ _ __ __
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or xmsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl; n is an integer from 0 to 4;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or misubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R7, CF3, CN, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R° is hydrogen, or taken together with R1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring; R2, R3, R4 and R5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or N(R7)2; R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or xmsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R7 is independently hydrogen, substituted or xmsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or xmsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF .
28. The method of claim 27 comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000090_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, clathrate, or stereoisomer thereof wherein: X is oxygen or sulfur; __ ^ _ _
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or xmsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or xmsubstituted heteroaryl, halogen, CF3, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R2, R3, R4 and R5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or NR7 2; and
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R7 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3.
29. The method of claim 28 comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000091_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, clathrate, or stereoisomer thereof wherein:
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or xmsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or xmsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl,
Figure imgf000092_0001
substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R2,CF3, CN, COOH, COR2, or COOR2;
R is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or xmsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOR2, SO2R2, NO2, NH2, or NR2 2;
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R2 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3.
30. The method of claim 27 comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the fonnula:
Figure imgf000092_0002
or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymoφhs, stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers, thereof wherein:
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R7, CF3, CN, COOH, COR7, or COOR7; _ _ _ _
R° is hydrogen, or taken together with R1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring;
R' are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or N(R7)2; and
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or misubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group.
31. The method of claim 27, 28, 29, or 30 wherein said disease is a genetic disease.
32. The method of claim 27, 28, 29, or 30 wherein said genetic disease is an autoimmune diseaase, a blood disease, a collagen disease, diabetes, an inflammatory disease, or a central nervous system disease.
33. The method of claim 32, wherein the autoimmune disease is rheumatoid arthritis or graft versus host disease.
34. The method of claim 32, wherein the inflammatory disease is arthritis.
35. The method of claim 32, wherein the central nervous system disease is multiple sclerosis, muscular dystrophy, late infantile neuronal ceroid lipofuscinosis,
Duchenne muscular dystrophy, Alzheimer's disease, Tay Sachs disease, a neurodegenerative disease or Parkinson's disease.
36. The method of claim 32, wherein the blood disease is hemophilia, Von Willebrand disease, ataxia-telangiectasia, b-thalassemia or kidney stones.
37. The method of claim 32, wherein the collagen disease is osteogenesis imperfecta or cinhosis.
38. The method of claim 32, wherein the genetic disease is familial polycythemia, immmiodeficiency, kidney disease, cystic fibrosis, familial _ _ _ _ hypercholesterolemia, retinitis pigmentosa, amyloidosis, atherosclerosis, giantism, dwarfism, hypothyroidism, hyperthyroidism, aging, obesity, Niemann Pick's disease or Marfan syndrome.
39. A method of treating or preventing a genetic disease, or ameliorating one or more symptoms associated with or manifestations of a genetic disease comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of formula V:
Figure imgf000094_0001
or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymoφhs, stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers thereof wherein:
X is oxygen, sulfur, CO, SO or S(O)2;
Y is oxygen or sulfur;
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl; n is an integer from 0 to 4;
Rl is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or misubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R7, CF3, CN, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R° is hydrogen, or taken together with R1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring;
R2, R3, R4 and R5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or xmsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or N(R7)2;
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or xmsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted
Figure imgf000095_0001
cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or misubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occmrence of R7 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3.
40. The method of claim 39 comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000095_0002
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, clathrate, or stereoisomer thereof wherein:
X is oxygen or sulfur; Z is substituted or xmsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, halogen, CF3, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R2, R3, R4 and R5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or xmsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or NR7 2; and
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and „ ,. ,, ,, ^ ^ each occunence of R7 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or misubstituted alkenyl, substituted or xmsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or xmsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3.
41. The method of claim 40 comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000096_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, clathrate, or stereoisomer thereof wherein:
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or xmsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or misubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R2,CF3, CN, COOH, COR2, or COOR2;
R is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOR2, SO2R2, NO2, NH2, or NR2 2;
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occunence of R2 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF .
42. The method of claim 39 comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactically effective amount of a compound of the formula:
43. The method of claim 39, 40, 41, or 42 wherein said genetic disease is an autoimmune diseaase, a blood disease, a collagen disease, diabetes, an inflammatory disease, or a central nervous system disease.
44. The method of claim 43, wherein the autoimmune disease is rheumatoid arthritis or graft versus host disease.
45. The method of claim 43, wherein the inflammatory disease is arthritis.
46. The method of claim 43, wherein the central nervous system disease is multiple sclerosis, muscular dystrophy, late infantile neuronal ceroid lipofuscinosis, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, Alzheimer's disease, Tay Sachs disease, a neurodegenerative disease or Parkinson's disease.
47. The method of claim 43, wherein the blood disease is hemophilia, Non Willebrand disease, ataxia-telangiectasia, b-thalassemia or kidney stones.
48. The method of claim 43, wherein the collagen disease is osteo genesis imperfecta or cirrhosis.
49. The method of claim 39, 40, 41, or 42, wherein the genetic disease is familial polycythemia, immunodeficiency, kidney disease, cystic fibrosis, familial hypercholesterolemia, retinitis pigmentosa, amyloidosis, atherosclerosis, giantism, dwarfism, hypothyroidism, hyperthyroidism, aging, obesity, Νeimann Pick's disease, or Marfan syndrome.
50. A method of treating, preventing or ameliorating cancer or one or more symptoms associated with or mamfestations of cancer comprising administering to a patient
Figure imgf000098_0001
in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactively effective amoimt of a compoxmd of formula V:
Figure imgf000098_0002
or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymoφhs, stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers thereof wherein:
X is oxygen, sulfur, CO, SO or S(O)2; Y is oxygen or sulfur;
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl; n is an integer from 0 to 4;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or misubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R7, CF3, CN, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R° is hydrogen, or taken together with R1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring;
R2, R3, R4 and R5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or misubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or N(R7)2;
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or xmsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or xmsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occurrence of R7 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF . ^ _ _ _ _
51. The method of claim 50 comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactively effective amoimt of a compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000099_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, clathrate, or stereoisomer thereof wherein:
X is oxygen or sulfur;
Z is substituted or xmsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, halogen, CF3, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R2, R3, R4 and R5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or misubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or NR7 2; and
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or xmsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occunence of R7 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3.
52. The method of claim 51 comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactively effective amoimt of a compound of the formula:
Figure imgf000100_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate, solvate, clathrate, or stereoisomer thereof wherein:
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or xmsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R2,CF3, CN, COOH, COR2, or COOR2; R is hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or misubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or misubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOR2, SO2R2, NO2, NH2, or NR2 2; R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occunence of R is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3.
53. The method of claim 50 comprising administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically or prophylactively effective amount of a compound of the fonnula:
Figure imgf000100_0002
or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymoφhs, stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers, thereof wherein:
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl;
R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or xmsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R7, CF3, CN, COOH, COR7, or COOR7; R° is hydrogen, or taken together with R1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring;
R' are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF , OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or N(R7)2; and
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or misubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group.
54. The method of claim 50, 51, 52 or 53 wherein said cancer is of the head and neck, eye, skin, mouth, throat, esophagus, chest, bone, lung, colon, sigmoid, rectum, stomach, prostate, breast, ovaries, kidney, liver, pancreas, brain, intestine, heart, adrenals, a solid tumor, sarcoma, carcinomas, fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendothehosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas, cystadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duct carcinoma, choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilms' tumor, cervical cancer, testicular tumor, lung carcinoma, small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, epithelial carcinoma, glioma, astrocytoma, medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, Kaposi's sarcoma, pinealoma, hemangioblastoma, acoustic neuroma, oligodendroglioma, menangioma, melanoma, neuroblastoma, retinoblastoma, a blood-born tumor, acute ^ _ ^ _ _ _ _ lymphoblastic leukemia, acute lymphoblastic B-cell leukemia, acute lymphoblastic T-cell leukemia, acute myeloblastic leukemia, acute promyelocytic leukemia, acute monoblastic leukemia, acute erythroleukemic leukemia, acute megakaryoblastic leukemia, acute myelomonocytic leukemia, acute nonlymphocyctic leukemia, acute undifferentiated leukemia, chronic myelocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, hairy cell leukemia, multiple myeloma, or p53-associated.
55. The method of claim 27, 28, 29, 30, 50, 51, 52 or 53 wherein the patient is a mammal.
56. The method of claim 26, 27, 28, 46, 47, or 48 wherein the compound is administered parenterally, transdermally, mucosally, nasally, buccally, subhngually, or orally.
57. The method of claim 56 wherein the compound is administered orally.
58. The method of claim 57 wherein the compound is administered orally in a tablet or capsule form.
59. The method of claim 27, 28, 29, 30, 50, 51 , 52 or 53 wherein the therapeutically or prophylactively effective amount is from about 1 mg to about 2000 mg per day.
60. The method of claim 59 wherein the therapeutically or prophylactively effective amoimt is from about 5 mg to about 500 mg per day.
61. The method of claim 55 wherein the therapeutically or prophylactively effective amount is from about 10 mg to about 200 mg per day.
62. A method of treating, preventing or ameliorating one or more symptoms associated with or manifestations of an autoimmune disease, a blood disease, a collagen disease, diabetes, an inflammatory disease, or a central nervous system disease comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula V:
Figure imgf000103_0001
or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, clathrates, prodrugs, polymoφhs, stereoisomers, including enantiomers, diastereomers, racemates or mixtures of stereoisomers thereof wherein: X is oxygen, sulfur, CO, SO or S(O)2;
Y is oxygen or sulfur;
Z is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl; n is an integer from 0 to 4; R1 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or xmsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, SO2R7, CF3, CN, COOH, COR7, or COOR7;
R° is hydrogen, or taken together with R1 and the atoms to which they are attached form an optionally substituted 5-7 membered heterocyclic, or heteroaryl ring;
R2, R3, R4 and R5 are independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen, CF3, OCF3, OCHF2, CN, COOH, COOR7, SO2R7, NO2, NH2, or N(R7)2;
R6 is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, or any biohydrolyzable group; and each occunence of R7 is independently hydrogen, substituted or unsubsituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl; substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocycloalkyl, substituted or xmsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, heteroaryloxy, halogen or CF3.
63. The method of claim 62 wherein said disease is rheumatoid arthritis, graft versus host disease, arthritis, multiple sclerosis, muscular dystrophy, late infantile nemonal ceroid lipofuscinosis, Duchenne muscular dystrophy, Alzheimer's disease, Tay Sachs disease, a neurodegenerative disease, Parkinson's disease, Niemann Pick's disease, hemophilia, Von Willebrand disease, ataxia-telangiectasia, b-thalassemia, kidney stones, osteogenesis imperfecta, cinhosis, familial polycythemia, immunodeficiency, kidney disease, cystic fibrosis, familial hypercholesterolemia, retinitis pigmentosa, amyloidosis, atherosclerosis, giantism, dwarfism, hypothyroidism, hyperthyroidism, aging, obesity, or Marfan syndrome.
PCT/US2003/023183 2002-07-24 2003-07-23 Acetylamino benzoic acid compounds and their use for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease WO2004009533A1 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2003254157A AU2003254157A1 (en) 2002-07-24 2003-07-23 Acetylamino benzoic acid compounds and their use for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease
EP03766013A EP1525185A1 (en) 2002-07-24 2003-07-23 Acetylamino benzoic acid compounds and their use for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease
CA002493457A CA2493457A1 (en) 2002-07-24 2003-07-23 Acetylamino benzoic acid compounds and their use for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease
US11/789,625 US7763656B2 (en) 2002-07-24 2007-04-24 Use of Acetylamino benzoic acid compounds for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US39826702P 2002-07-24 2002-07-24
US60/398,267 2002-07-24

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US11/048,657 Continuation US7247741B2 (en) 2002-07-24 2005-01-21 Acetylamino benzoic acid compounds and their use for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2004009533A1 true WO2004009533A1 (en) 2004-01-29

Family

ID=30771207

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2003/023183 WO2004009533A1 (en) 2002-07-24 2003-07-23 Acetylamino benzoic acid compounds and their use for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease

Country Status (4)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1525185A1 (en)
AU (1) AU2003254157A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2493457A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2004009533A1 (en)

Cited By (26)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006016637A1 (en) * 2004-08-11 2006-02-16 Kyorin Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Novel cyclic aminobenzoic acid derivative
WO2006044456A1 (en) * 2004-10-13 2006-04-27 Ptc Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for nonsense suppression, and methods for their use
WO2007047706A2 (en) * 2005-10-17 2007-04-26 Children's Hospital Methods and compositions for regulating gene expression
WO2008004798A1 (en) * 2006-07-04 2008-01-10 Korea Research Institute Of Bioscience And Biotechnology Compounds that inhibit hif-1 activity, the method for preparation thereof and the pharmaceutical composition containing them as an effective component
WO2008135448A1 (en) * 2007-05-03 2008-11-13 Neurosearch A/S Beta-keto-amide derivatives useful as ion channel modulators
WO2009063412A1 (en) * 2007-11-12 2009-05-22 Institut National De La Sante Et De La Recherche Medicale (Inserm) Use of chemical compounds for the treatment of aids
US7569723B2 (en) 2004-08-02 2009-08-04 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Benzoic acid derivatives as non nucleoside reverse-transcriptase inhibitors
JP2010519214A (en) * 2007-02-19 2010-06-03 サントル・ナシオナル・ドゥ・ラ・ルシェルシュ・シアンティフィーク（セーエヌエールエス） Novel indole derivative compound and pharmaceutical composition containing the same
US7763656B2 (en) * 2002-07-24 2010-07-27 Ptc Therapeutics, Inc. Use of Acetylamino benzoic acid compounds for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease
JP2011503210A (en) * 2007-11-16 2011-01-27 ライジェル ファーマシューティカルズ， インコーポレイテッド Carboxamide, sulfonamide, and amine compounds for metabolic disorders
EP2387995A1 (en) 2006-03-30 2011-11-23 PTC Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for the production of functional protein from DNA having a nonsense mutation and the treatment of disorders associated therewith
WO2012059048A1 (en) * 2010-11-03 2012-05-10 中国中化股份有限公司 Pyrazole amide compound and use thereof
AU2006332535B2 (en) * 2005-12-30 2013-03-14 Nono Inc. Small molecule inhibitors of PDZ interactions
CN103467399A (en) * 2013-09-03 2013-12-25 浙江医药高等专科学校 Triazole amide compounds, and preparation method and application thereof
US8633160B2 (en) 2005-12-30 2014-01-21 Nono Inc. Small molecule inhibitors of PDZ interactions
JP2014015441A (en) * 2012-07-11 2014-01-30 Chiba Prefecture Anti-cancer agent
CN103554043A (en) * 2013-09-03 2014-02-05 浙江医药高等专科学校 Phenyl-substituted triazole amide compounds and application
WO2014032755A3 (en) * 2012-08-29 2014-07-17 Merck Patent Gmbh Ddr2 inhibitors for the treatment of osteoarthritis
WO2015008230A1 (en) * 2013-07-18 2015-01-22 Novartis Ag Autotaxin inhibitors comprising a heteroaromatic ring-benzyl-amide-cycle core
WO2016172437A3 (en) * 2015-04-24 2017-02-16 The Johns Hopkins University Small molecule compounds targeting pbx1 transcriptional complex
CN106478447A (en) * 2015-09-01 2017-03-08 上海医药工业研究院 Carboxylic acid derivates and its application as FXR antagonist
WO2017049409A1 (en) * 2015-09-25 2017-03-30 The Centre For Drug Research And Development Compositions for promoting readthrough of premature termination codons, and methods of using the same
WO2017112956A1 (en) 2015-12-23 2017-06-29 Moonshot Pharma Llc Methods for inducing an immune response
CN112424167A (en) * 2018-07-09 2021-02-26 葛兰素史密斯克莱知识产权发展有限公司 Chemical compound
WO2022135617A1 (en) * 2020-12-22 2022-06-30 清华大学 Novel nampt enzyme agonist and preparation and use thereof
US11654135B2 (en) 2017-06-22 2023-05-23 Moonshot Pharma Llc Methods for treating colon cancer with compositions comprising amlexanox and immune checkpoint inhibitors

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS51149240A (en) * 1975-06-17 1976-12-22 Mitsubishi Yuka Yakuhin Kk Process for preparing new 3-substituted aminophenylacetic acid derivat ives
JPH07138221A (en) * 1993-11-11 1995-05-30 Fujisawa Pharmaceut Co Ltd Amidino compound
EP0816329A1 (en) * 1996-06-18 1998-01-07 Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft Benzoic acid derivatives, process for their preparation and their use for the treatment of diseases
WO1998017267A1 (en) * 1996-10-23 1998-04-30 Zymogenetics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating bone deficit conditions
WO2001044516A2 (en) * 1999-12-14 2001-06-21 Tularik Inc. Methods of assaying for compounds that inhibit premature translation termination and nonsense-mediated rna decay
WO2002018321A2 (en) * 2000-08-29 2002-03-07 Abbott Laboratories Amino(oxo)acetic acid protein tyrosine phosphatase inhibitors

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS51149240A (en) * 1975-06-17 1976-12-22 Mitsubishi Yuka Yakuhin Kk Process for preparing new 3-substituted aminophenylacetic acid derivat ives
JPH07138221A (en) * 1993-11-11 1995-05-30 Fujisawa Pharmaceut Co Ltd Amidino compound
EP0816329A1 (en) * 1996-06-18 1998-01-07 Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft Benzoic acid derivatives, process for their preparation and their use for the treatment of diseases
WO1998017267A1 (en) * 1996-10-23 1998-04-30 Zymogenetics, Inc. Compositions and methods for treating bone deficit conditions
WO2001044516A2 (en) * 1999-12-14 2001-06-21 Tularik Inc. Methods of assaying for compounds that inhibit premature translation termination and nonsense-mediated rna decay
WO2002018321A2 (en) * 2000-08-29 2002-03-07 Abbott Laboratories Amino(oxo)acetic acid protein tyrosine phosphatase inhibitors

Non-Patent Citations (13)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"AMBINTER: EXPLORATORY LIBRARY", 30 April 2003, AMBINTER, PARIS, F-75016, FRANCE *
"INTERCHIM INTERMEDIATES", 9 July 2002, INTERCHIM, MONLUCON, CEDEX, 03103, FRANCE *
ACTA POLONIAE PHARMACEUTICA (1981), 38(5), 533-7 *
BARTON-DAVIS E.R. ET AL.: "AMINOGLYCOSIDE ANTIBIOTICS RESTORE DYSTROPHIN FUNCTION TO SKELETAL MUSCLES OF MDX MICE", JOURNAL OF CLINICAL INVESTIGATION, vol. 104, no. 4, 1999, pages 375 - 381, XP002261722 *
DATABASE CA [online] CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS SERVICE, COLUMBUS, OHIO, US; KOBAYASHI, TOSHIHIKO ET AL: "3-Substituted aminophenylacetic acid derivatives", XP002261727, retrieved from STN Database accession no. 87:84684 *
DATABASE CA [online] CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS SERVICE, COLUMBUS, OHIO, US; LI, L. M. ET AL: "Anticancer agents: synthesis of 4-chlorophenoxyacetamide derivatives", XP002261724, retrieved from STN Database accession no. 123:285896 *
DATABASE CA [online] CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS SERVICE, COLUMBUS, OHIO, US; LI, LIANGQUAN ET AL: "Tumor chemotherapy. XXXXII. Synthesis of 2,4- dichlorophenoxyacetyl derivatives of amino acids and their antitumor activity", XP002261725, retrieved from STN Database accession no. 97:72722 *
DATABASE CA [online] CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS SERVICE, COLUMBUS, OHIO, US; RYZNERSKI, ZYGMUNT ET AL: "Phenoxyacetamide derivatives with potential antiinflammatory activity", XP002261728, retrieved from STN Database accession no. 97:55420 *
DATABASE CA [online] CHEMICAL ABSTRACTS SERVICE, COLUMBUS, OHIO, US; TAKASUGI, HISASHI ET AL: "Amidino compounds as glycoprotein IIb/IIIa antagonists and pharmaceutical compositions containing them", XP002261726, retrieved from STN Database accession no. 123:285545 *
DATABASE CHEMCATS Chemical Abstracts Service, Columbus, Ohio, US, retrieved from STN; XP002261723 *
DATABASE CHEMCATS Chemical Abstracts Service, Columbus, Ohio, US, retrieved from STN; XP002261729 *
YAOXUE XUEBAO (1981), 16(8), 625-7 *
YAOXUE XUEBAO (1995), 30(7), 556-60 *

Cited By (54)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7763656B2 (en) * 2002-07-24 2010-07-27 Ptc Therapeutics, Inc. Use of Acetylamino benzoic acid compounds for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease
US7569723B2 (en) 2004-08-02 2009-08-04 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Benzoic acid derivatives as non nucleoside reverse-transcriptase inhibitors
JPWO2006016637A1 (en) * 2004-08-11 2008-05-01 杏林製薬株式会社 New cyclic aminobenzoic acid derivatives
US7902367B2 (en) 2004-08-11 2011-03-08 Kyorin Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Cyclic amino benzoic acid derivative
WO2006016637A1 (en) * 2004-08-11 2006-02-16 Kyorin Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Novel cyclic aminobenzoic acid derivative
EP3067053A1 (en) * 2004-10-13 2016-09-14 PTC Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for nonsense suppression, and methods for their use
US9611230B2 (en) 2004-10-13 2017-04-04 Ptc Therapeutics, Inc. 1,3,4-oxadiazole benzoic acid compounds and their use for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease
EP2939674A1 (en) * 2004-10-13 2015-11-04 PTC Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for nonsense suppression, and methods for their use
WO2006044456A1 (en) * 2004-10-13 2006-04-27 Ptc Therapeutics, Inc. Compounds for nonsense suppression, and methods for their use
WO2007047706A3 (en) * 2005-10-17 2007-08-09 Childrens Hosp Medical Center Methods and compositions for regulating gene expression
US10159754B2 (en) 2005-10-17 2018-12-25 The Children's Medical Center Corporation Methods and compositions for regulating gene expression
WO2007047706A2 (en) * 2005-10-17 2007-04-26 Children's Hospital Methods and compositions for regulating gene expression
US11517630B2 (en) 2005-10-17 2022-12-06 Children's Medical Center Corporation Methods and compositions for regulating gene expression
AU2006332535B2 (en) * 2005-12-30 2013-03-14 Nono Inc. Small molecule inhibitors of PDZ interactions
US8633160B2 (en) 2005-12-30 2014-01-21 Nono Inc. Small molecule inhibitors of PDZ interactions
EP2387995A1 (en) 2006-03-30 2011-11-23 PTC Therapeutics, Inc. Methods for the production of functional protein from DNA having a nonsense mutation and the treatment of disorders associated therewith
WO2008004798A1 (en) * 2006-07-04 2008-01-10 Korea Research Institute Of Bioscience And Biotechnology Compounds that inhibit hif-1 activity, the method for preparation thereof and the pharmaceutical composition containing them as an effective component
US8394799B2 (en) 2006-07-04 2013-03-12 Korea Research Institute Of Bioscience And Biotechnology Compounds that inhibit HIF-1 activity, the method for preparation thereof and the pharmaceutical composition containing them as an effective component
JP2010519214A (en) * 2007-02-19 2010-06-03 サントル・ナシオナル・ドゥ・ラ・ルシェルシュ・シアンティフィーク（セーエヌエールエス） Novel indole derivative compound and pharmaceutical composition containing the same
WO2008135448A1 (en) * 2007-05-03 2008-11-13 Neurosearch A/S Beta-keto-amide derivatives useful as ion channel modulators
WO2009063412A1 (en) * 2007-11-12 2009-05-22 Institut National De La Sante Et De La Recherche Medicale (Inserm) Use of chemical compounds for the treatment of aids
EP2062578A1 (en) * 2007-11-12 2009-05-27 Institut National De La Sante Et De La Recherche Medicale (Inserm) Novel use of chemical compounds for the treatment of AIDS
JP2011503210A (en) * 2007-11-16 2011-01-27 ライジェル ファーマシューティカルズ， インコーポレイテッド Carboxamide, sulfonamide, and amine compounds for metabolic disorders
US8614214B2 (en) 2010-11-03 2013-12-24 Sinochem Corporation Pyrazole amide compounds and uses thereof
CN103124726B (en) * 2010-11-03 2016-01-06 中国中化股份有限公司 Pyrazol acid amide compounds and uses thereof
CN103124726A (en) * 2010-11-03 2013-05-29 中国中化股份有限公司 Pyrazole amide compound and use thereof
WO2012059048A1 (en) * 2010-11-03 2012-05-10 中国中化股份有限公司 Pyrazole amide compound and use thereof
JP2014015441A (en) * 2012-07-11 2014-01-30 Chiba Prefecture Anti-cancer agent
WO2014032755A3 (en) * 2012-08-29 2014-07-17 Merck Patent Gmbh Ddr2 inhibitors for the treatment of osteoarthritis
US9763957B2 (en) 2013-07-18 2017-09-19 Novartis Ag Autotaxin inhibitors
EA035256B1 (en) * 2013-07-18 2020-05-21 Новартис Аг Autotaxin inhibitors comprising a heteroaryl-benzyl-amide core
WO2015008230A1 (en) * 2013-07-18 2015-01-22 Novartis Ag Autotaxin inhibitors comprising a heteroaromatic ring-benzyl-amide-cycle core
CN105555783A (en) * 2013-07-18 2016-05-04 诺华股份有限公司 Autotaxin inhibitors comprising a heteroaromatic ring-benzyl-amide-cycle core
US10183025B2 (en) 2013-07-18 2019-01-22 Novartis Ag Autotaxin inhibitors
CN103554043A (en) * 2013-09-03 2014-02-05 浙江医药高等专科学校 Phenyl-substituted triazole amide compounds and application
CN103554043B (en) * 2013-09-03 2015-04-01 浙江医药高等专科学校 Phenyl-substituted triazole amide compounds and application
CN103467399A (en) * 2013-09-03 2013-12-25 浙江医药高等专科学校 Triazole amide compounds, and preparation method and application thereof
CN103467399B (en) * 2013-09-03 2015-01-07 浙江医药高等专科学校 Triazole amide compounds, and preparation method and application thereof
WO2016172437A3 (en) * 2015-04-24 2017-02-16 The Johns Hopkins University Small molecule compounds targeting pbx1 transcriptional complex
US10800742B2 (en) 2015-04-24 2020-10-13 The Johns Hopkins University Small molecule compounds targeting PBX1 transcriptional complex
CN106478447A (en) * 2015-09-01 2017-03-08 上海医药工业研究院 Carboxylic acid derivates and its application as FXR antagonist
CN106478447B (en) * 2015-09-01 2018-10-30 上海医药工业研究院 Carboxylic acid derivates and its application as FXR antagonists
WO2017049409A1 (en) * 2015-09-25 2017-03-30 The Centre For Drug Research And Development Compositions for promoting readthrough of premature termination codons, and methods of using the same
WO2017112956A1 (en) 2015-12-23 2017-06-29 Moonshot Pharma Llc Methods for inducing an immune response
US10898483B2 (en) 2015-12-23 2021-01-26 Moonshot Pharma Llc Methods for inducing an immune response by promoting premature termination codon read-through
US10966976B2 (en) 2015-12-23 2021-04-06 Moonshot Pharma Llc Methods for inducing an immune response by inhibition of nonsense mediated decay
US11135221B2 (en) 2015-12-23 2021-10-05 Moonshot Pharma Llc Methods for inducing an immune response
WO2017112954A1 (en) 2015-12-23 2017-06-29 Moonshot Pharma Llc Methods for inducing an immune response by promoting premature termination codon read-through
US11957678B2 (en) 2015-12-23 2024-04-16 Moonshot Pharma Llc Methods for inducing an immune response
US11654135B2 (en) 2017-06-22 2023-05-23 Moonshot Pharma Llc Methods for treating colon cancer with compositions comprising amlexanox and immune checkpoint inhibitors
CN112424167A (en) * 2018-07-09 2021-02-26 葛兰素史密斯克莱知识产权发展有限公司 Chemical compound
WO2022135617A1 (en) * 2020-12-22 2022-06-30 清华大学 Novel nampt enzyme agonist and preparation and use thereof
CN114716343A (en) * 2020-12-22 2022-07-08 清华大学 Novel NAMPT enzyme agonist, preparation and application thereof
CN114716343B (en) * 2020-12-22 2023-03-21 清华大学 Novel NAMPT enzyme agonist, preparation and application thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU2003254157A8 (en) 2004-02-09
CA2493457A1 (en) 2004-01-29
EP1525185A1 (en) 2005-04-27
AU2003254157A1 (en) 2004-02-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US9861617B2 (en) Compositions of 1,2,4-oxadiazole benzoic acid compounds and methods for their use
US7763656B2 (en) Use of Acetylamino benzoic acid compounds for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease
US8334313B2 (en) Ureido substituted benzoic acid compounds and their use for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease
EP1525185A1 (en) Acetylamino benzoic acid compounds and their use for nonsense suppression and the treatment of disease

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2493457

Country of ref document: CA

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2003766013

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2003766013

Country of ref document: EP

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Country of ref document: JP